Skip to main content

Full text of "Spalding's how to play foot ball;"

See other formats 


n  Group  II,  No. 300. 

I    GV  951 

1      '^ 
■    1907 

1    ^^^   1 

B  ATHLETIC   1 

^^^Evft  y^^'^'i'tS'  j^^fl^^^^^^H 

Price  10  cents 


LIBRARY 


HOW 

TO  rn^rn 

PLAY 


H,  FOOT  BALL 


ff  Edited  by"  ^%^^^m§^l^^m, 

Walter  Camp 

'"l '■ ■• 7 

American  Sports  Publishing  Co..,i 

••;. '•%       21  Warren  street.  NewYorK    ,fmi,u,.%,mi 


/4-    iM.,  4, 


Grand  Prize 
St.  Louis,  1904 


Grand  Prix 
Paris,  1900 


A.  G.  Spalding  &   Bros. 

Maintain  their  own  Wholesale  and  Retail 
Stores  for  the  Distribution  of 

Spalding's  Athletic  Library 

and  a  complete  line  of 

SPALDING  ATHLETIC  GOODS 

in  the  following  cities: 


NEW  YORK 

Downtown— 124-128  Nassau  Street 
Uptown— 29-33  Bi^st  42d  Street 
PHILADELPHIiOm 

lOKt^ilbert  Street 
BOSTON,  MASS. 

73  Federal  Street 
BALTIMORE,  MD.     . 

208  EasfBytOTiore  Street 
WASHINGTON,  D;  V. 

709  14th  Strdfet,  N.  W. 

(Colorado  Building) 
PITTSBURG,  PA. 

439  Wood  Street 
BUFFALO,  N.  Y. 

611  Main  Street 
SYRACUSE,  N.  Y. 

University  Block 
NEW  ORLEANS,  LA. 

140  Carondelet  Street 


CHICAGO 

147-149  Wabash  Avenue 
ST.  LOUIS.  MO. 

710  Pine  Street 
CINCINNATI,  O. 

Fountain  Square 

27  East  Fifth  Street 
CLEVELAND,  O. 

741  Euclid  Avenue 
KANSAS  CITY,  MO. 

1111  Walnut  Street 
MINNEAPOLIS,  MINN. 

39  Sixth  Street,  South 
DETROIT,  MICH. 

254  Woodward  Avenue 
DENVER,  COL. 

1616  Arapahoe  Street 
SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL. 

134  Geary  Street 


MONTREAL,  CANADA,  443  St.  James  Street 
LONDON,  ENGLAND.  {tesfEn'd  Slnch^t  Haymarket,  S.  W. 


Communications  directed  to  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bros,  at  any  of  the  above 
addresses,  will  receive  ^i^ompt  attention. 


=Dff: 


* 


SPALDING'S 

ATHLETIC 

LIBRARY 


-ft- 


Spalding's  Athletic  Library  is  admitted  to  be  the 
leading  library  series  of  its  kind  published  in  the  world. 
In  fact,  it  has  no  imitators,  let  alone  equals.  It  occupies 
a  field  that  it  has  created  for  itself. 

The  Library  was  established  in  the  year  1892,  and  it 
is  an  admitted  fact  by  all  authorities  that  Spalding's 
Athletic  Library  has  been  an  important  factor  in  the 
advancement  of  amateur  sport  in  America. 

The  millions  that  read  the  Library  during  the  year 
will  attest  to  its  value.  A  glance  at  its  index  will  dis- 
close the  remarkable  field  that  it  covers.  It  is  im- 
material what  the  pastime  may  be,  you  will  find  in 
Spalding's  Athletic  Library  a  reference  to  it,  either  in 
a  book  devoted  exclusively  to  that  particular  game  or 
in  some  of  the  books  that  cover  many  sports. 

It  has  been  the  aim  of  the  editors  to  make  the  books 
Official,  and  they  are  recognized  as  such,  all  the  im- 
portant governing  bodies  in  America  granting  tq  the 
publishers  of  Spalding's  Athletic  Library  the  right  to 
publish  their  official  books  and  official  rules. 

A  glance  at  the  names  of  the  authors  of  the  different 
volumes  will  convince  the  reader  that  the  best  men  in 
each  particular  line,  the  men  best  qualified  to  write 
intelligently  on  each  subject,  are  selected ;  and,  as  a 
result,  there  is  not  another  series  in  the  world  like 
Spalding's  Athletic  Library  series. 

It  is  immaterial  what  new  game  or  form  of  sport  be 
conceived  or  advanced,  it  is  invariably  the  aim  of  the 
publishers  to  have  a  book  on  that  sport.  In  that  way 
Spalding's  Athletic  Library  is  in  the  field  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  sport,  follows  it  year  in  and  year  out,  and 
there  can  be  no  doubt  whatever  that  the  present  pop- 
ularity of  athletic  sports  can  attribute  the  same  to  the 
"backing"  it  has  received  from  Spalding's  Athletic 
Library.  JAMES   E.  SULLIVAN. 


SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LIBRAeV 

Giving  the  Titles  of  all  Spalding  Athletie  Library  [? 
Boohs  now  in  print,  grouped  tor  ready  reference  iL 


SPALDING  OFFICIAL  ANNUALS 


Spalding's  Official  Base  Ball  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Foot  Ball  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Association  Foot  Ball  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Cricket  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Lawn  Tennis  Annual 
Spalding's  Official  Golf  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Ice  Hockey  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Basket  Ball  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Bowling  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Indoor  Base  Ball  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Roller  Polo  Guide 
Spalding's  Official  Athletic  Alma^iac 


Base  Ball 

Base  Ball 


No.  I 
No.  2 
No.  2a 
No.  3 
No.  4 
No.  5 
No.  6 
No.  7 
No.  8 
No.  9 
No.  lO 
No.  12 

€roDp  I. 

No.  1   Spalding's  Official 
Guide. 

No.  202    How  to  Play  Base  Ball. 

No.  223    How  to  Bat. 

No.  232    How  to  Run  Bases. 

No.  230    How  to  Pitch. 

No.  229    How  to  Catch. 

No.  225    How  to  Play  First  Base. 

No.  226    How  to  Play  Second  Base. 

No.  227    How  to  Play  Third  Base. 

No.  228    How  to  Play  Shortstop. 

No.  224    How  to  Play  the  Outfield. 

How  to  Organize  a  Base  Ball 

Club.  [League. 

How  to  Organize  a  Base  Ball 

How  to  Manage  a  Base  Ball 

No.     ^       Club. 
231        How  to  Train  a  Base  Ball  Team 
How  to  Captain  a  Base  Ball 
How  to  Umpire  a  Game.  [Team 
Technical  Base  Ball  Terms. 

No.  219    Ready  Reckoner  of  Base  Ball 
Percentages. 

BASE  BALL  AUXILIARIES 
No.  291    Minor  League  Base  Ball  Guide 
No.  293    Official  Book  National  League 
of  Prof 'nal  Base  Ball  Clubs. 


Foor  Ball 

Official  Foot  Ball 


Group  II. 

No.   2 


Spalding' 

Guide. 
No.  300    How  to  Play  Foot  Ball. 
No.  2a    Spalding's    Official    (Soccer) 

Association  Foot  Ball  Gidde 
No.  286    How  to  Play  Soccer. 


FOOT  BALL  AUXILIARIES 
No.  283    Spalding's  Official    Canadian 

Foot  Ball  Guide. 
No.  294    Official  Intercollegiate  Asso'n 

Soccer  Foot  Dall  Guide. 

crichet 


Group  III. 

No.  3  Spalding's  Official  Cricket  Guide 
No.  277    Cricket  and  How  to  Play  It. 


Group  IV. 

No.    4 


Lawn  Tennis 


Spalding's  Official  Lawn  Ten- 
nis Annual. 

No.  157    How  to  Play  Lawn  Tennis. 

No.  279  Strokes  and  Science  of  Lawn 
Tennis. 

Group  V.  Goir 

No.    5      Spalding's  Official  GolfGuidt 
No.  276    How  to  Play  Golf. 

Group  VI.  Hockey 

No.    6      Spalding's  Official  Ice  Hockey 

Guide. 
No.  154    Field  Hockey. 
No.  188.     Lawn  Hockey. 
No.  180.     Ring  Hockey. 

HOCKEY  AUXILIARY 
No.  256.    Official    Handbook     Ontario 

Hockey  Association. 

Group  VII.  Basket  Ball 

No.      7    Spalding's  Official  Basket 

Ball  Guide. 
No.  193    How  to  play  Basket  Ball. 
No.  260    Basket  Ball  Guide  for  Women. 

BASKET  BALL  AUXILIARY 
No.  299    Official  Collegiate  Basket  Ball 

Handbook. 


Any   of   the    Above    Books    Mailed    Postpaid    Upon 
Receipt   of   10    Cents 


-^SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY/7^ 


Groap  VIII. 


Bowling 


No. 


8    Spaldi7ig's    Official    Bowling 
Guide. 


Group  IX 

No. 


iDdoor  Base  Ball 


9    Spalding's  Official    Indoor 
Base  Ball  Guide. 


Group  X 

No 


Polo 


10    Spalding's  Official  Roller  Polo 
Guide. 
No.  129    Water  Polo. 
No.  199    Equestrian  Polo. 

Group  XI.     Miscellaneous  Games 

No.  201    Lacrosse. 

No.  297    Official  Handbook  U.  S.  Inter- 
coUegriate  Lacrosse  League. 
No.  248    Archery. 
No.  138    Croquet. 
No.  271     Roque. 

[Racquets. 
No.  194 -j  Squash-Racquets. 

(Court  Tennis. 
No.    13     Hand  Ball. 
No.  167    Quoits. 
No.  170     Push  Ball. 
No.    14     Curling. 
No.  207     Lawn  Bowls. 
No.  188    Lawn  Games. 
No.  189    Children's  Games. 


Group  XII. 


Athletics 


No.    12    Spalding's     Official    Athletic 
Ahna  nar. 
College  Athletics. 
All  Around  Athletics. 
Athletes'  Guide. 
Athletic  Primer. 
Olympic  Gamesat  Athens,1906 
How  to  Sprint. 
How  to  Run  100  Yards. 
Distance  and  Cross  Country 
Running. 
No.  259    How    to    Become   a   Weight 
Thrower. 
Official  Sporting  Rules. 
Athletic  Training  for  School- 
boys. 

ATHLETIC  AUXILIARIES 
No.  295    Amateur  Athletic  Union  Offi- 
cial Handbook. 
No.  292    Intercollegiate  Official  Hand- 
book. 
Y.  M.  C.  A.  Official  Handbook. 
Public   Schools  Athletic 
League  Official  Handbook. 
No.  274    Intercollegiate  Cross  Country 
Association  Handbook. 


No.  27 
No.  182 
No.  156 
No.  87 
No.  273 
No.  252 
No.  255 
No.  174 


No.    55 
No.  246 


No.  245 
No.  281 


Group  XIII. 


Athletic 
Accomplishments 


No.  177  How  to  Swim. 

No.  296  Speed  Swimming. 

No.  128  How  to  Row. 

No.  209  How  to  Become  a  Skater. 

No.  178  How  to  Train  for  Bicycling. 

No.    23  Canoeing. 

No.  282  Roller  Skating  Guide. 


Group  XIV. 


Manly  Sports 


No.    18  Fencing.     (ByEreck). 

No.  162  Boxing. 

No.  165  Fencing.     (  By  Senac  ). 

No.  140  Wrestling. 

No.  236  How  to  Wrestle. 

No.  102  Ground  Tumbling. 

No.  233  Jiu  Jitsu. 

No.  166  How  to  Swing  Indian  Clubs. 

No.  200  Dumb  Bell  Exercises. 

No.  143  Indian  Clubs  and  Dumb  Bells. 

No.  262  Medicine  Ball  Exercises. 

No.    29  Pulley  Weight  Exercises. 

No.  191  How  to  Punch  the  Bag. 

No.  289  Tumbling  for  Amateurs. 

Group  XV.  Gymnastics 

No.  104  Grading  of  Gymnastic  Exer- 
cises. 

No.  214  Graded  Cal  isthenics  and 
Dumb  Bell  Drills. 

No.  254    Barnjum  Bar  Bell  Drill. 

No.  158  Indoor  and  Outdoor  Gym- 
nastic Games. 

No.  124    How  to  Become  a  Gymnast. 

No.  287  Fancy  Dumb  Bell  and  March- 
ing Drills. 


Group 

No.  161 

No.  208 

No.  149 

No.  142 
No.  185 
No.  213 
No.  238 
No.  234 

No.  261 
No.  285 

No.  288 

No.  290 


XVI. 


Physical  culture 


Ten  Minutes'  Exercise  for 
Busy  Men. 

Physical  Education  and  Hy- 
giene. 

Scientific  Physical  Training 
and  Care  of  the  Body. 

Physical  Training  Simplified. 

Hints  on  Health. 

285  Health  Answers. 

Muscle  Building. 

School  Tactics  and  Maze  Run- 
ning. 

Tensing  Exercises. 

Health  by  Muscular  Gym- 
nastics. 

Indigestion  Treated  by  Gym- 
np  sties. 

Get  Well :  Keep  Well. 


Any    of   the    Above    Books    Mailed    Postpaid    Upon 
Receipt   of  10    Cents 


g^  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LmRARY/^ 


Group  I.     Base  Ball 

No.        1— Spaldins:'s        Official 
Base   Ball   Guide. 

The  leading  Base  Ball 
annual  of  the  country, 
and  the  official  authority 
of  the  game.  Edited  by 
Henry  Chadwick,  the 
"Father  of  Base  Ball." 
Contains  the  official  play- 
ing rules,  with  an  ex- 
planatory index  of  the 
rules  compiled  by  Mr. 
A.  G.  Spalding;  pictures  of  all  the 
teams  in  the  National,  American  and 
minor  leagues;  official  averages;  re- 
views of  the  season  in  all  the  pro- 
fessionHl  o^rganizations;  college  Base 
Ball,  and  a  great  deal  of  interesting 
Information.     Price   10   cents. 


No.    202— How   to    Play    Base 
Ball. 

Edited  by  Tim  Mur- 
nane.  New  and  revised 
edition.  illustrated 
with  pictures  showing 
how  all  the  various 
curves  and  drops  are 
thrown  and  portraits  of 
leading  players.  Con- 
tents—art of  pitching, 
catching  department,  infield  of  a  ball 
team,  playing  the  outfield,  fine  art  of 
batting,  art  of  base-running,  squeeze 
play,  delayed  steal,  art  of  throwing, 
use  of  signals,  short  talks  on  a  variety 
of  base  ball  topics,  Spalding's  simpli- 
fied base  ball  rules,  compiled  especially 
for  boys  by  A.  G.  Spalding.  Price  10 
cents. 


No.    223— How    to    Bat. 

The     most     important 

part  of  ball  playing  now 
adays,  outside  of  pitch 
ing,  is  batting.  The  team 
that  can  bat  and  has 
some  good  pitchers  can 
win  base  ball  games; 
therefore,  every  boy  and 
young  man  who  has,  of 
course,  already  learned  to 
catch,  should  turn  his  attention  to 
this  department  of  the  game,  and 
there  is  no  better  way  of  becoming 
proficient  than  by  reading  this  book 
and  then  constantly  practising  the 
little  tricks  explained.     Price  10  cts. 


No.     232— How     to     Run     the 
Bases. 

The  importance  of  base 
running  as  a  scientific! 
feature  of  the  national! 
game  is  becoming  morel 
and  more  recognized  each| 
year.  Besides  being  spec- 
tacular, feats  of  base  I 
stealing  nearly  alwa 
figure  in  the  winning  of  I 
a  game.  Many  a  close' 
contest  is  decided  on  the  winning  of 
that  little  strip  of  90  feet  which  lies 
between  cushions.  When  hits  are 
few  and  the  enemy's  pitchers  steady, 
it  becomec  incumbent  on  the  oppos- 
ing team  to  get  around  the  bases  in 
some  manner.  Effective  stealing  not 
only  increases  the  effectiveness  of 
the  team  by  advancing  its  runners 
without  wasting  hits,  but  it  serves 
to  materially  disconcert  the  enemy 
and  frequently  has  caused  an  entire 
opposing  club  to  temporarily  lose  its 
poise  and  throw  away  the  game. 
This  book  gives  clear  and  concise  di- 
rections for  excelling  as  a  base  run- 
ner; tells  when  to  run  and  when  not 
to  do  so;  how  and  when  to  slide; 
team  work  on  the  bases;  in  fact, 
every  point  of  the  game  is  thor- 
oughly explained.  Illustrated  with 
pictures  of  leading  players.  Price  10 
cents. 

No.   230— How   to   Pitcli. 

A  new,  up-to-date  book. 
The  object  of  this  book 
is  to  aid  the  beginners 
who  aspire  to  become 
clever  twirlers,  and  its 
contents  are  the  practi- 
cal teaching  of  men  who 
have  reached  the  top  as 
pitchers,  and  who  know 
how  to  impart  a  knowl- 
edge of  their  art.  All  the  big 
leagues'  pitchers  are  shown.  Price 
10  cents. 

No.   229— How   to    Catch. 

Undoubtedly  the  best 
book  on  catching  thatf 
has  yet  been  published. 
Every  boy  who  has  hopes 
of  being  a  clever  catcher] 
should  read  how  well- 
known  players  cover  their  I 
position.  Among  t  h  e| 
more  noted  ones  who  de- 
scribe their  methods  of 
p^ay  in  this  book  are  Lou  Criger  of 
the  Boston  Americans  and  Johnnie 
Kling  of  the  Chicago  Nationals.  The 
numerous  pictures  comprise  all  the 
noted  catchers  In  the  big  leagues. 
Price  10  cents. 


^XXSPALDING  ATHLETIC  imRARY/^ 


No.    225— How    to    Play    First 

Base. 

No  other  position  in  a 
ball  team  has  shown 
such  a  change  for  the 
better  in  recent  years  as 
first  base.  Modifications 
in  line  with  the  better- 
ment of  the  sport  in 
every  department  have 
Iteen  made  at  intervals, 
but  in  no  other  depart- 
ment have  they  been  so  radical.  No 
boy  who  plays  the  initial  sack  can 
afford  to  overlook  the  points  and 
hints  contained  in  this  book.  En- 
tirely new  and  up  to  date.  Illus- 
trated with  full-page  pictures  of  all 
the  prominent  first  basemen.  Price 
10  cents. 


No.  226— How  to  Play  Second 
Base. 

There  are  so  few  men 
who  can  cover  second 
base  to  perfection  that 
their  names  can  easily 
be  called  off  by  anyone 
who  follows  the  game  of 
base  ball.  Team  owners 
who  possess  such  players 
would  not  part  with 
them  for  thousands  of 
dollars.  These  men  have  been  inter- 
viewed and  their  ideas  incorporated 
in  this  book  for  the  especial  benefit 
of  boys  who  want  to  know  the  fine 
points  of  play  at  this  point  of  the 
diamond.  Illustrated  with  full-page 
pictures.     Price  10  cents. 


No.  227— How  to  Play  Third 
Base. 

Third  base  is,  in  some 
respects,  the  most  impor 
tant  of  the  infield.  No 
major  league  team  has 
ever  won  a  pennant  with 
Dut  a  great  third  base 
man.  Cnllins  of  the  Bos 
ton  Americans  and  Leach 
uf  Pittsburg  are  two  of 
the  greatest  third  base- 
men the  game  has  ever  seen,  and 
their  teams  owe  much  of  the  credit 
for  pennants  they  have  won  to 
them.  These  men  in  this  book  de- 
scribe just  how  they  play  the  posi- 
tion. Everything  a  player  should 
know  is  clearly  set  forth  and  any 
boy  will  surely  increase  his  chances 
of  success  by  a  careful  reading  of 
this  book.  Illustrated.  Price  10 
cents. 


No.  228— How  to  Play  Short- 

Shortstop  is  one  of  the 
hardest  positions  on  the 
iiiti.'ld  to  fill,  and  quick 
thought  and  quick  action 
are  necessary  for  a  play- 
er who  expects  to  make 
good  as  a  shortstop.  The 
views  of  every  well- 
known  player  who  cov- 
ers    this     position     have 

been    sought   in   compiling    this   book, 

Illustrated.      Price    10  cents. 

No.  224— How  to  Play  the 
Outfield. 

Compiled  especially  for 
the  young  player  who 
would  become  an  expert. 
The  best  book  on  play- 
ing the  outfield  that  has 
ever  been  published. 
There  are  just  as  many 
tricks  to  be  learned,  be- 
fore a  player  can  be  a 
competent  fielder,  a  s 
there  are  in  any  other  position  on  a 
nine,  and  this  book  explains  them 
all.      Price    10  cents. 

No.  231— How  to  Coach;  How 
to  Captain  a  Team;  How- 
to  Manage  a  Team;  How^ 
to  Umpire:  How  to  Or- 
sraiiize  a  League;  Tech- 
nical Terms  of  Base  Ball. 

A    useful    guide    to    all 

who  are  interested  in  the 
above  subjects.  Jimmy 
Collins  writes  on  coach- 
ing; M.  J.  Kelly  on  cap- 
taining; Al  Buckenberger 
on  managing;  Frank 
Dwyer  of  the  American 
League  staff  on  umpir- 
ing; Fred  Lake  on  minor 
leagues,  and  the  editor.  T.  H.  Mur- 
nane.  President  of  the  New  England 
League,  on  how  to  organize  a  league. 
The  chapters  on  Technical  Terms  of 
Base  Ball  have  been  written  by 
Henry  Chadwlck,  the  "Father  of 
Base  Ball,"  and  define  the  meaning 
of  all  the  terms  peculiar  to  the  Na- 
tional Game.      Price   10  cents. 

No.  219— Ready  Rechoner  of 
Base    Ball    Percentagres. 

To     supply     a     demand  i 
for    a    book    which    would 
show    the    percentage    of 
clubs  without  recourse  to  | 
the   arduous   work   of  fig 
uring,        the       publishers  I 
have     had     these     tables  [ 
compiled    by     an    expert. 
Price   10   cents. 


g^  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LffiRARYy^ 


BASK    BALL.    ALXILL\RIES. 

No.  291— Minor  Leag^ue   Base 
Ball    Guide. 

The  minors'  own  guide. 
Contains  pictures  o  f 
leading  teams,  schedules, 
report  of  annual  meeting 
National  Association  of 
Professional  Base  Ball 
Leagues,  special  articles 
and  official  rules.  Edited 
by  President  T.  H.  Mur- 
nane,  of  the  New  England  League. 
Price  10  cents. 

No.     293— Official     Hanclbook 
of     the     IVational     League 
of  Professional  Base  Ball 
Clubs.      Contains    the    Constitu- 
tion,     By-Laws,      Official 
Rules,       Averages,       and 
schedule   of   the   Na 
tional     League     for     the 
current      year,      together 
with     list     of     club     offi- 
cers   and    reports    of    th.' 
annual    meetings    of    the 
League.       Every    follower 
of   the   game    should   have   a   copy    of 
this    book    if    he    wants    to    keep    his 
file     of     Base     Ball    books    complete. 
Price  10  cents. 


Group  11.     Foot  Ball 

No.       2— Spalding's        Official 
Foot    Ball    Guide. 

Edited  by  Walter 
Camp.  Contains  the  new 
rules,  with  diagram  of 
field;  All- America  teams 
as  selected  by  the  lead- 
ing authorities;  reviews 
of  the  game  from  vari- 
ous sections  of  the  coun- 
try; scores  of  all  the 
leading  teams;  pictures 
of  hundreds  of  players, 
cents. 

No.    300— How    to    Play    Foot 
Ball. 

Edited  by  Walter 
I  Camp.  The  contents  em- 
brace everything  that  a 
beginner  wants  to  know 
I  and  many  points  that  an 
[expert  will  be  glad  to 
learn.  The  pictures  are 
made  from  snapshots  of 
leading  teams  and  play- 
ers iu  action,  with  com- 
ments by  Walter  Camp.  Price  10 
cents. 


Price     10 


No.  2A— Spalding's  Official 
Association  Soccer  Foot 
Ball   Guide. 


A  complete  and  up-to- 
date  guide  to  the 
"Soccer"  game  in  the 
United  States,  containing 
instructions  for  playing 
the  game,  official  rules, 
and  interesting  news 
from  all  parts  of  the 
country.  Illustrated. 

Price  10  cents. 


No.    286— How    to    Play    Soc- 
cer. 

Owing  to  the  great 
interest  shown  in  "Soc- 
cer" foot  ball  in  Amer- 
ica, the  publishers  have 
had  a  book  compiled  iu 
England,  the  home  of  the 
sport,  telling  how  each 
position  should  be  played, 
written  by  the  best  play- 
er in  England  in  his  re- 
spective position,  and  illustrated 
with  full-page  photographs  of  play- 
ers in  action.  As  a  text-book  of 
the  game  this  work  is  invaluable, 
and  no  "Soccer"  player  can  afford 
to  be  without  it.     Price  10  cents. 


FOOT    BALL,    AUXILIARIES. 

No.     283- Spalding's     Official 
Canadian         Foot  Ball 

Guide. 


Edited  by  Frank  D. 
Woodworth,  Secretary- 
Treasurer  Ontario  Rugby 
Foot  Ball  Union.  The 
official  book  of  the  game 
in  Canada.  Price  10 
cents. 


No.     294— Official     Intercolle- 
giate   Association    Soccer 
Foot    Ball 
Guide. 

Contains  the  constitu- 
tion and  by-laws  of  the 
Association,  pictures  of 
the  teams,  and  official 
playing  rules.  Price  10 
cents. 


<^SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LffiRARY/T^ 


Group  m.       Cricket 

No.        3— Simldin&'s        Official 
Cricket    Guide. 

Edited  by  Jerome  Flau- 
nery.  The  most  com- 
plete year  book  of  the 
pame  that  has  ever  been 
iml.lisbed  in  America 
Kt'ltorts  of  special 
ui.ittbes,  official  rule: 
and  pictures  of  all  the 
li-ading  teams.  Price  10 
ceuts. 

No.    277— Cricket;    and    How 
to    Play    it. 
By  Prince  Ranjitslnhji. 

Every       department       of 

the     game     is     described 

concisely    and    illustrated 

with      full-page     pictures 

posed   especially    for   this 

book.       The      best      book 

of      instruction      on      the 

g  a  m  e     ever     published. 

I'rlce  10  cents. 


Group  IV. 


Lawn 
Tennis 


No.        4— Spalclingr's        Official 
La^u  Tennis   Annual. 

Edited  by  II.  P.  Bur- 
chell,  of  the  New  York 
Times.  Contents  include 
a  report  of  every  impor 
tant  tournament  played 
in  1906,  embracing  th 
National  Championshii 
sectional  and  State  toui 
naments;  invitation  and 
open  tournaments;  inter- 
collegiate and  interscholastic  cham- 
pionships; women's  national  cham- 
pionships; foreign  championships;  in- 
door championships;  official  ranking 
for  each  year  from  1885  to  1900; 
laws  of  lawn  tennis;  instructions  for 
handicapping;  decisions  on  doubtful 
points;  regulations  for  the  manage- 
ment of  tournaments;  directory  of 
clubs;  directions  for  laying  out  and 
keeping  a  court;  tournament  notes. 
Illustrated  with  pictures  of  leading 
players.      Price  10   cents. 

No.    157— How   to    Play  La^n 
Tennis. 

A  complete  description 
of  lawn  tennis;  a  lesson 
for  beginners  and  direc- 
tions telling  how  to 
make  the  most  impor- 
tant strokes.  Illustrated. 
Price  10  cents. 


No.  279— Strokes  and  Science 
of  L.aT*n   Tennis. 

By  P.  A.  Vaile,  a 
leading  authority  on  the 
game  in  Great  Britain. 
Every  stroke  in  the 
game  is  accurately  illus- 
trated and  analyzed  by 
the  author.  As  a  means 
of  affording  a  compari- 
son between  the  Amer- 
ican and  the  English 
methods  of  play,  this  book  is  ex- 
tremely  useful.      Price    10   cents. 


Golf 

Official 


Group  V. 

No.        5— Spalding's 
Golf  Guide. 

The  leading  annual  of 
the  game  in  the  United 
States.  Contains  rec- 
enis  of  all  important 
tnuinaments,  articles  on 
tlie  game  in  various  sec- 
tions of  the  countrv, 
pictures  of  prominent 
players,  official  playing 
rules  and  general  items 
of  interest.     I'rice  10  cts. 


No.   276— How    to    Play    Golf. 

By  James  Braid  and 
Harry  Vardon.  A  glance  at 
the  chapter  headings 
will  give  an  idea  of  the 
vari(>ty  and  value  of  the 
(■  o  n  tents:  Beginners' 
wrong  ideas;  method  of 
tuition;  choosing  the 
clubs;  how  to  grip  the 
club;  stance  and  address  in  driving; 
the  upward  swing  in  driving,  etc.; 
Numerous  full-page  pictures  of  Cham- 
pions Braid  and  Vardon  in  action  add 
to  the  book's  attractiveness.     Price  10 


Group  VI.      Hockey 

No.  «— Spaldingr's  Official  Ice 
Hockey     Guide. 

The  official  year  book 
of  the  game.  Contains 
the  official  rules,  pictures 
of  leading  teams  and 
players,  records,  review 
of  the  season,  reports 
from  different  sections  of 
the  United  States  and 
Canada,  and  other  valu- 
able information.  Prieo 
10  cents. 


g^  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY //» 


No.    154— Field    Hockey, 

To  those  in  need  of 
vigorous  and  healthful 
out-of-doors  exer  c  i  s  e, 
this  game  is  recom- 
mended  highly.  Its 
healthful  attributes  are 
manifold  and  the  inter- 
est of  player  and  spec- 
tator alike  is  kept  ac- 
>  through  out  the 
progress  of  the  game.  The  game  is 
prominent  in  the  sports  at  Vassar, 
Smith.  Wellesley,  Bryn  Mavri  and 
other  leading  colleges.     Price  10  cents. 

No.  188  —  Lawn 
Hockey,  Garden 
Hockey,  Parlor 
Hockey. 

Containing  the  rules 
for  each  game.  Illus- 
trated.     Price    10    cents. 

No.  180— Ring  Hockey, 

A  new  game  for  the 
gymnasium,  invented  by 
Dr.  J.  M.  Vorhees  of 
Pratt  Institute,  ,  Brook 
lyn,  that  has  sprung 
into     instant     popularity; 

I  as  exciting  as  basket 
ball.      This   book   contains 

I  official  rules.  Price  10 
cents. 

HOCKEY    AUXILIARY 

No.     25«— Official     Handbook 

of     the     Ontario     Hockey 

Association. 

Edited  by  W.  A.  Hew- 
itt, of  Toronto.  Con- 
tains the  official  rules 
of  the  Association,  con- 
stitution, rules  of  com- 
petition, list  of  officers, 
and  pictures  of  leading 
players.      Price  10  cents. 


Group  VII. 


Basket 
Ball 


No.        7— Spalding's        Official 
Basket    Ball    Guide. 

Edited  by  George  T. 
Hepbron.  Contains  the 
revised  official  rules,  de- 
cisions on  disputed 
points,  records  of  promi- 
nent teams,  reports  on 
the  game  from  various 
parts  of  the  country, 
and  pictures  of  hundreds 
of      players.        Price      10      cents. 


No.  193— How  to  Play  Basket 
Ball. 

By  G.  T.  Hepbron, 
editor  of  the  Official 
Basket  Ball  Guide.  Con- 
tains full  instructions 
for  players,  both  for  the 
expert  and  the  novice, 
duties  of  officials,  and 
specially  posed  full-page 
pictures  showing  the  cor- 
rect and  incorrect  meth- 
ods of  playing.  The  demand  for  a 
book  of  this  character  is  fully  satis- 
fled  in  this  publication,  as  many 
points  are  included  which  could  not 
be  incorporated  in  the  annual  publi- 
cation of  the  Basket  Ball  Guide  for 
want  of  room.     Price  10  cents. 

No.  260— Official  Basket  Ball 
Guide  for  Women. 

Edited  by  Miss  Senda 
Berenson,  of  Smith  Col- 
lege. Contains  the  of- 
ficial playing  rules  of 
the  game  and  special  ar- 
ticles on  the  following 
sul)jects:  Games  for 
women,  by  E.  Hitchcock, 
Director  of  Physical 
Training,  and  Dean  of 
College,  Amherst  College;  condition 
of  women's  basket  ball  in  the  Mid- 
dle West,  by  W.  P.  Bowen,  Michigan 
State  Normal  College;  psychological 
effects  of  basket  ball  for  women,  by 
Dr.  L.  H.  Gulick;  physiological  ef- 
fects of  basket  ball,  by  Theodore 
Hough,  Ph.  D. ;  significance  of  basket 
ball  for  women,  by  Senda  Berenson; 
relative  merit  of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A. 
rules  and  women's  rules,  by  Augusta 
Lane  Patrick;  A  Plea  for  Basket 
Ball,  by  Julie  Ellsbee  Sullivan, 
Teachers'  College,  New  York;  dia- 
gram of  field.  Illustrated  with 
many  pictures  of  basket  ball  teams. 
Price    10   cents. 

BASKET    BALL.    AUXILIARY. 

No.     29»— Collesriate     Basket 
Ball     Handbook. 

The  official  publication 
of  the  new  Collegiate 
Basket  Ball  Associa- 
tion. Contains  the  of- 
ficial rules,  collegiate 
and  high  school  records, 
All  America  selections, 
reviews  of  the  collegiate 
basket  ball  season  of 
1905-6,  and  pictures  of 
all  the  prominent  college  teams  and 
individual  players.  Edited  by  H.  A. 
Fisher,    of    Columbia.      Price    10   cts. 


gx\  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LffiRARY//^ 


Group  VIII.  Bowling 

No.        8— Spaldinff's        Official 
Bowling:     Guide. 

Edited  by  S.  Karpf, 
Secretary  of  the  Amer- 
icaa  Bowling  Congress. 
The  contents  include: 
History  of  the  sport; 
diagrams  of  effective  de- 
liveries; how  to  bowl;  a 
few  hints  to  beginners; 
American  Bowling  Con- 
gress; the  national 
championships;  how  to  build  an  al- 
ley; how  to  score;  spares — how  they 
are  made.  Rules  for  cocked  hat, 
cocked  hat  and  feather,  quintet,  bat- 
tle game,  nine  up  and  nine  down, 
head  pih  and  four  back,  ten  pins — 
head  pin  out,  five  back,  the  Newport 
game,   ten  pin  head.      Price   10  cents. 


Group  IX. 


Indoor 
Base  Ball 


No.  9— Spaldingr's   Official  In- 
door   Base    Ball    Gnide. 

America's     nat  i  o  n  a  1  | 
game  is  now   vieing  with 
other   indoor   games   as   a 
winter        pastime.        This 
book    contains    the    play- 
ing     rules,      pictures      of 
leading    teams    from     all  | 
parts      of      the      country, 
and     interesting     articles  I 
on    the    game    by    leading 
authorities  on  the   subject, 
cents. 


Price  10 


Group  X. 


Polo 


No.       lO— Spalding's 
Official      Roller 
Polo    Guide. 

Edited  by  J.  C.  Morse. 
A  full  description  of  the 
game;  official  rules,  rec- 
ords.    Price  10  cents. 


No.   129— W^ater   Polo. 

The  contents  of  this 
book  treat  of  every  de- 
tail, the  individual  work 
of  the  players,  the  prac- 
tice of  the  team,  how 
to  throw  the  ball,  with 
illustrations  and  many 
valuable  hints.  Price 
10  cents. 


199— Elquestrlan   Polo. 

Compiled  by  H.  L. 
Fitzpatrick  of  the  New 
York  Sun.  Illustrated 
v.ith  portraits  of  lead- 
ing players  and  contains 
most  useful  information 
for  polo  players.  Price 
10   cents. 

_        „,  Miscellane- 
GroupXI.  ous  Games 

No.   201— Lacrosse. 

By  William  C. 
Schmeisser.  c  «,  p  t  a  i  n  | 
Johns  Hopkins  Univer- 
sity champion  intercol- 
legiate lacrosse  team  of  I 
1902;  edited  by  Ronald 
T.  Abercrombie,  ex-cap- 
tain and  coach  of  Johns  | 
Hopkins  University  la- 
crosse team,  1900-1904. 
Every  position  is  thoroughly  ex- 
plained in  a  most  simple  and  concise 
manner,  rendering  it  the  best  manual 
of  the  game  ever  published.  Illus- 
trated with  numerous  snapshots  of 
important  plays.     Price  10  cents. 

No.  297— Official  Handbook 
U.  S.  Inter-Collegiate  La- 
crosse   League. 

Contains  the  constitution,  by- 
liiws,  plaving  rules,  list  of  officers 
and  records  of  the  association. 
Price    10   cents. 

No.  271— Spalding»s  Official 
Roque    Guide. 

The  official  publication 
of  the  National  Roque 
Association  of  America. 
Edited  by  Prof.  CharleB 
Jacobus,  ex-cham  p  i  o  n, 
Contains  a  description 
nf  the  cowts  and  their 
<(inst?ruction,        diagrams 

of  the  field,  illustra- 
tions,   rules   and   valuable 

information.     Price    10    cents. 

No.  138— Spalding's  Official 
Crociuet    Guide 

Contains  directions  for 
playing,  diagrams  of  im- 
portant strokes,  descrip- 
tion of  grounds,  instruc- 
tions for  the  beginner, 
terms  used  in  the  game, 
and  the  official  playing 
rules.      Price   10   cents. 


g^  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LffiRARY/^ 


No.    24S— Archery, 

A  new  and  up-to-date 
book  on  this  fascinating 
pastime.  Edited  by  Mr. 
Louis  Maxson  of  Wasli- 
iiigton,  D.  C,  ex-Na- 
tional champion.  Con- 
ains  a  history  of  arch- 
ery from  its  'revival  as  a 
pastime  in  the  eighteenth 
century  to  the  present 
time,  with  list  of  winners  and  scores 
of  the  English  Grand  championships 
from  1844;  National  Archery  Associa- 
tion of  the  United  States  winners 
and  scores;  the  several  varieties  of 
archery;  instructions  for  shooting; 
how  to  select  implements;  how  to 
score;  and  a  great  deal  of  interest- 
ing Informatioh  on  the  game.  Illus- 
trated.    Price   10  cents. 

No.  194 — Racquets,  Sqna.sli- 
Racriuet.s  and  Court  Ten- 
nis. 

The  need  of  an  au- 
thoritative handbooli  at 
a  popular  price  on  these 
games  is  filled  by  this 
booli.  How  to  play  each 
game  is  thoroughly  ex- 
plained, and  all  the  dif- 
licult  stroliCS  shown  by 
special  photo  graphs 
taken  especially  for  this 
book.  Contains  the  official  rules  for 
each  game,  with  photographs  of 
well-known  courts.     Price  10  cents. 


No.    167— Quoits. 

By  M.  W.  Deshong. 
The  need  of  a  book  on 
this  interesting  game 
has  been  felt  by  many 
who  wished  to  know  the 
fine  points  and  tricks 
used  by  the  experts. 
Mr.  Deshong  explains 
them,  with  illustrations, 
so  that  a  novice  can 
readily    understand.      Price    10   cents. 

No.    170— Push    Ball. 

Played  with  an  air- 
Inflated  ball  6  feet  in 
diameter,  weighing  about 
50  pounds.  A  side  con- 
sists of  eleven  men. 
This  book  contains  the 
ofiicial  rules  and  a 
sketch  of  the  game;  il- 
lustrated. Price  10 
•euts. 


No.    1.-?— How    to    Play    Hand 
Ball. 

By  the  world's  cham- 
pion, Michael  Egan,  of 
Jerse.v  City.  This  book 
has  been  rewritten  and 
brought  up  to  date  in 
every  particular.  Every 
play  is  thoroughly  ex- 
plained by  text  and 
diagram.  The  numerous 
illustrations  consist  of 
full  pages  made  from  photographs  of 
Champion  Egan,  showing  him  in  all 
his  characteristic  attitudes.  Price 
10  cents. 

No.    14— Curling. 


A  short  history  of 
this  famous  Scottish 
pastime,  with  instruc- 
ions  for  play,  rules  of 
the  game,  definitions  of 
terms  and  diagrams  of 
different  shots.  Price 
10  cents. 


No.      :i07— Bowling      on      the 
Green;   or,  Lawn   Bowls. 

How  to  construct  a 
green;  necessary  equip- 
ment; how  to  play  the 
game,  and  the  official 
rules  as  promulgated  by 
the  Scottish  Bowling 
Association.  Edited  by 
James  W.  Greig.  Illus- 
trated.    Price  lO  cents. 

No.    188— L,a>vn    Games. 


Cftntains  the  rules  for 
Lawn  Hockey,  Garden 
Ildckey,  Hand  Tennis, 
Teth.'r  Tennis;  also  Vol- 
ley Ball,  Parlor  Hockey, 
Badminton,  Basket  Goal. 
Price    10    cents. 


No.    189— Children's    Games. 

Compiled  by  Jessie  H. 
Bancroft,  director  of 
physical  training,  depart- 
ment of  education,  New 
York  City.  These  games 
are  intended  for  use  at 
recesses,  and  all  but  the 
team  games  have  been 
adapted  to  large  classes. 
Suitable  for  children 
from  three  to  eight  years,  and  in- 
clude a   great   variety.     Price   10  cts. 


"^SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LffiRARY/T^ 


Group  Xn.  Athletics 

No.      12— Spalding's       Official 
Athletic  Almanac. 

Compilerl  bj-  J.  E.  Sul- 
livan, Chief  Department 
I'liysical  ("ulture,  IjOuIs- 
iana  I'tireliase  Exposi- 
Dircctur  Oljinpic 
(Panics,  1'J(j4,  Special 
runuuissioner  from  the 
I  iiited  States  to  the 
Olympic  Games  at  Ath- 
ens, 1906,  and  President 
of  the  Amateur  Athletic  Union,  The 
only  annual  publication  now  issued 
that  contains  a  complete  list  of  ama- 
teur best-on-records;  complete  inter- 
collegiate records;  complete  English 
records  from  1866;  swimming  rec- 
ords; interscholastic  records;  Irish, 
Scotch,  Continental,  South  African 
and  Australasian  records;  important 
athletic  events  and  numerous  photos 
of  individual  athletes  and  leading 
athletic    teams.      Price    10   cents. 

No.    27— Collesre   Athletics. 

M.  C.  Murphy,  the 
well-known  athletic 
trainer,  now  with  Penn- 
sylvania, the  author  of 
this  book,  has  written  it 
especially  for  the  school- 
boy and  college  man, 
but  it  is  invaluable  for 
the  athlete  who  wishes 
to  excel  in  any  branch 
of  athletic  sport.  The  subjects  com- 
prise the  following  articles:  Train- 
ing, starting,  sprinting;  how  to  train 
for  the  quarter,  half,  mile  and  longer 
distances;  walking;  high  and  bmad 
jumping;  hurdling;  pole  vaulting; 
throwing  the  hammer.  It  is  profuse- 
ly illustrated  with  pictures  of  lead- 
ing athletes.     Price   10  cents. 

No.       182— All-Aronnd       Ath- 
letics. 

Gives  in  full  the 
method  of  scoring  the 
A 11- Around  Cham  p  i  o  n- 
ship,  giving  percentage 
tables  showing  what 
each  man  receives  for 
e  a  c  h  performance  in 
each  of  the  ten  events. 
It  contains  as  well  in- 
structive articles  on  how 
to  train  for  the  Ail-Around  Cham- 
pionship. Illustrated  with  many  pic- 
tures of  champions  in  action  and 
scores  at  all-around  meets.  Price 
10  cents. 


\o.     15(>— Athlete's     Guide. 

How  to  become  an 
athlete.  It  contains  full 
instructions  for  the  be- 
ginner, telling  how  to 
sprint,  hurdle,  jump  and 
throw  weights,  general 
hints  on  training;  in 
fact,  this  book  is  one 
of  the  most  complete  on 
the  subject  that  has 
ever  appeared.  Special  chapters  con- 
tain valuable  advice  to  beginners  and 
important  A.  A.  U.  rules  and  their 
explanations,  while  the  pictures  com- 
|)rise  many  scenes  of  champions  in 
action.     Price  10  cents. 


No. 


87 — Athletic    Primer. 

Edited  by  James  E. 
Sullivan,  President  of 
the  Amateur  Athletic 
Union.  Tells  how  to  or- 
ganize an  athletic  club, 
liuw  to  conduct  an  ath- 
letic meeting,  and  gives 
rules  for  the  govern- 
ment of  athletic  meet- 
ings; contents  also  in- 
'  directions  for  building  a  track 
laying  out  athletic  grounds,  and 
ry  instructive  article  on  train- 
fully  illustrated  with  pictures  of 
ng   athletes.      Price   10  cents. 


\o.  273— The  Olympic  Games 
at    Athens 

A  complete  account  of 
the  Olympic  Games  of 
1006,  at  Athens,  the 
gieatest  Internati  o  n  a  1 
Athletic  Contest  ever 
leld.  Containing  a  short 
history  of  the  games, 
story  of  the  American 
team's  trip  and  their 
reception  at  Athens, 
comi)lete  list  of  starters  in  every 
event;  winners,  their  times  and  dis- 
tances; the  Stadium;  list  of  winners 
in  previous  Olympic  Games  at  Ath- 
ens, Paris  and  St.  Louis,  and  a  great 
deal  of  other  interesting  information. 
Comi)iled  by  J.  E.  Sullivan,  Special 
Commissioner  from  the  United  States 
to    the    Olympic    Games.   Price  10  cts. 

No.  252— How  to  Sprint. 

A  complete  and  de- 
tailed account  of  how  to 
train  for  the  short  dis- 
tances. Every  athlete 
who  aspires  to  be  a 
sininter  can  study  this 
book  to  advantage  and 
gain  useful  knowledge. 
Price   10  cents. 


gX\ SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY/^ 


No.     255— How     to     Run     100 
Yards. 

By  J.  W.  Morton,  the 
noted  British  champion. 
Written  by  Mr.  Morton 
during  his  recent  Amer- 
ican trip,  in  1905,  es- 
pecially for  boys.  Mr. 
Morton  knows  how  to 
handle  his  subject,  and 
his  advice  and  direc- 
'tions  for  attaining 
speed,  will  undoubtedly  be  of  im- 
mense assistance  to  the  great  ma- 
jority of  boys  who  have  to  rely  on 
printed  instructions.  Many  of  Mr. 
Morton's  methods  of  training  are 
novel  to  American  athletes,  but  his 
success  is  the  best  tribute  to  their 
worth.  Illustrated  with  photographs 
of  Mr.  Morton  in  action,  taken  es- 
pecially for  this  book  in  New  York 
City.     Price  10  cents. 


No.  174— Distance  and  Cross- 
country  Rnnningr. 

By  George  Orton,  the 
famous  University  of 
Pennsylvania  runner. 
Tells  how  to  become 
proficient  at  the  quar- 
ter, half,  mile,  the 
longer  distances,  and 
c  r  o  s  s-country  running 
and  steeplechasing,  with 
instructions  for  training 
and  schedules  to  be  observed  when 
preparing  for  a  contest.  Illustrated 
with  numerous  pictures  of  leading 
athletes  in  action,  with  comments  by 
the  editor  on  the  good  and  bad 
points  shown.     Price  10  cents. 


No.    259— Weight    Tlirowing. 

By  James  S.  Mitchel, 
Champion  American 
weight  thrower,  and 
holder  of  American, 
Irish,  British  and  Cana- 
dian champio  n  s  h  i  p  s. 
Probably  no  other  man 
in  the  world  has  had 
the  varied  and  long  ex- 
perience of  James  S. 
Mitchel  in  the  weight  throwing  de- 
partment of  athletics.  The  book  is 
written  in  an  instructive  way,  and 
gives  valuable  information  not  only 
for  the  novice,  but  for  the  expert  as 
well.     Illustrated.     Price  10  cents. 


No.      246— Athletic     Training 
for    Schoolboys. 

This  book  is  the  most 
complete  work  of  its 
kind  yet  attempted.  The 
compiler  is  Geo.  W.  Or- 
ton, of  the  University 
of  Pennsylvania,  a  fa- 
mous athlete  himself 
and  who  is  well  quali- 
tied  to  give  instructions 
to  the  beginner.  Each 
event  in  the  Intercollegiate  pro- 
gramme is  treated  of  separately, 
both  as  regards  method  of  training 
and  form.  By  following  the  direc- 
tions given,  the  young  athlete  will 
be  sure  to  benefit  himself  without  the 
danger  of  overworking  as  many  have 
done  through  Ignorance,  rendering 
themselves  unfitted  for  their  task 
when  the  day  of  competition  arrived. 
Price  10  cents. 


for    Sc] 


IVo.         55— Official 
Rules. 


Sporting 


Contains  rules  not 
found  in  other  publica- 
tions for  the  government 
of  many  sports;  rules 
for  wrestling,  shuffle- 
board,  snowshoeing,  pro- 
fessional racing,  pigeon 
flying,  dog  racing,  pistol 
and  revolver  shooting, 
British  water  polo  rules, 
Rugby  foot  baU  rules.     Price  10  et». 


ATHLETIC    AUXILIARIES. 

No.    295— Official       Handbook 
of    the    A.A.U. 

The  A.A.U.  is  the 
governing  body  of  ath- 
letes in  the  United 
States  of  America,  and 
all  games  must  be  held 
under  its  rules,  which 
are  exclusively  published 
in  this  handbook,  and  a 
copy  should  be  in  the 
hands  of  every  athlete 
and  every  club  officer  in  America. 
This  book  contains  the  official  rules 
for  running,  jumping,  weight  throw- 
ing, hurdling,  pole  vaulting,  swim- 
ming, boxing,  wrestling,  etc.  Price 
10  cents. 


g^^  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LffiRARY/^ 


No.  292— Official  Intercolle- 
giate A.A.A.A.  Handbook. 

Contains  constitution, 
by-laws,  laws  of  ath- 
k'tics  and  rules  to  gov- 
ern the  awarding  of  the 
championship  cup  of  the 
Intercollegiate  Athletic 
Association  of  Amateur 
Athletes  of  America, 
the  governing  bodj'  in 
college  athletics.  Con- 
tains official  intercollegiate  records 
from  1876  to  date,  with  the  winner's 
name  and  time  in  each  event,  list  of 
points  won  by  each  college,  and  list 
of  officers  of  the  association  from 
1889.     Price  10  cents. 

No.  24.'5— Official  Y.M.C.A. 
Handbook. 

Edited  by  G.  T.  Hep- 
bron,  the  well-known 
athletic  authority.  It 
contains  the  official  rules 
governing  all  sports  un- 
der the  jurisdiction  of 
the  Y.M.C.A.,  a  com- 
plete report  of  the 
physical  directors'  con- 
ference, official  Y.M.C.A. 
scoring  tables,  pentathlon  rules,  many 
pictures  of  the  leading  Y.M.C.A. 
athletes  of  the  country;  official  Y.M. 
C.A.  athletic  rules,  constitution  and 
by-laws  of  the  Athletic  League  of 
Y.M.C.A.,  all-around  indoor  test,  vol- 
ley ball  rules;  illustrated.  Price  10 
cents. 

Tio.  2S1— Official  Handbook 
of  the  Public  Schools 
Athletic   Lieagrue. 

This  is  the  official 
handbook  of  the  Public 
SchMuls  Athletic  Leagu 
which  embraces  all  the 
l)ublic  schools  of  Greater 
New  York.  It  contains 
the  official  rules  tha 
govern  all  the  contests 
of  the  league,  and  con 
stitution,  by-laws  and 
Edited  by  Dr.  Luther  Hal- 
«ey  Gulick,  superintendent  of  phy 
sical  education  in  the  New  York 
public  schools.  Illustrated.  Price 
10  cents. 

No.       298— Intercol- 
legiate    Cross 
Country      Hand- 
book. 
Contains       constitution 
«nd    by-laws,    list    of    of- 
ficers, and  records  of  the 
association.    ^  Price       10 
cent*.  ' 


officers. 


Group  XIII.   Athletic 
Accomplishments 

No.    177— How    to    Swim, 

By  J.  H.  Sterrett,  a 
leading  American  Bwim- 
ming  authority.  The  in- 
structions will  interest 
the  expert  as  well  as  the 
novice;  the  illuatrationa 
were  made  from  photo- 
graphs especially  posed, 
showing  the  Bwimmer  in 
clear  water;  a  valuable 
feature  is  the  series  of  "land  drill" 
exercises  for  the  beginner,  which  ia 
Illustrated  by  many  drawings.  The 
contents  comprise:  A  plea  for  educa- 
tion in  swimming;  swimming  as  an 
exercise  and  for  development;  land 
drill  exercises;  plain  swimming;  best 
methods  of  learning;  the  brea«t 
stroke,  etc  ,  etc      Price  10  cents. 

No.    396— Speed    Swimmlngr. 

By  Champion  C.  M. 
Daniels  of  the  New 
York  Athletic  Club  team, 
holder  of  numerous 
American  records,  and 
the  best  swimmer  In 
America  qualified  to 
write  on  the  subject. 
Any  boy  should  be  able 
to  increase  his  speed  in 
the  water  after  reading  Ghamploa 
Daniels'  instructions  on  the  subject. 
Price   10   cents. 

No.    12S— How    to    Row. 

By  E.  J.  Giannini,  of 
the  New  York  A.  C, 
one  of  America's  most 
famous  amateur  oars- 
men and  champ!  o  n  8. 
This  book  will  instruct 
any  one  who  la  a  lover 
of  rowing  how  to  be- 
come an  expert.  It  is 
fully  illustrated,  show- 
ing how  to  hold  the  oars,  the  finish 
of  the  stroke  and  other  information 
that  will  prove  valuable  to  the  be- 
ginner. Price  10  cents. 
No.  23— Canoeing. 

Paddling,  sailing, 
cruising  and  racing  ca- 
noes and  their  uses; 
with  hints  on  rig  and 
management;  the  choice 
of  a  canoe;  sailing  ca- 
noes; racing  regula- 
tions; canoe  I  n  g  and 
camping.  Fullj  illus- 
trated.     Price    10    cents. 


t^  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY/^ 


No.    209— How    to    Become    a 
Skater. 

Contains  advice  for  be- 
ginners; how  to  become 
a  figure  skater  thorough- 
ly explained,  with  many 
diagrams  showing  how 
to  do  all  the  different 
tricks  of  the  best  figure 
skaters.  Illustrated  with 
pictures  of  prominent 
skaters  and  numerous 
diagrams.      Price    10  cents. 

No.   282- Official    Roller 
Skating  Guide. 

Contains  directions  for 
becoming  proficient  as  a 
fancy  and  trick  roller 
skater,  and  rules  for 
roller  skating.  Pictures 
of  prominent  trick  skat- 
ers in  action.  Price  10 
cents. 

No.    178— How     to    Train    for 
Bicycling, 

Gives  methods  of  the 
best  riders  when  train 
ing  for  long  or  short 
distance  races;  hints 
on  training.  Revised 
and  up-to-date  in  every 
particular.  Price  10 
cents. 

Group  XIV.      sjforts 

No.    140— Wrestling. 

Catch  as  catch  can 
style.  By  E.  11.  Hitch- 
cock, M.D.,  of  Cornell, 
and  R.  F.  Nelligan,  of 
Amherst  College.  The 
book  contains  nearly 
seventy  illustrations  of 
the  different  holds,  pho- 
tographed especially  and 
so  described  that  any- 
body who  desires  to  become  expert 
in  wrestling  can  with  little  effort 
learn  every   one.     Price   10  cents. 


No.    18— Fencing-. 

By  Dr.  Edward  Breck, 
of  Boston,  editor  of  the 
Swordsman,  and  a  promi- 
nent amateur  fencer.  A 
book  that  has  stood  the 
test  of  time,  and  is  uni- 
versally acknowledged  to 
be  a  standard  work.  II- 
Price  10  cents. 


No.    162— Boxing    Gaide. 

For  many  years  books 
have  been  issued  on  the 
art  of  boxing,  but  it 
has  remained  for  us  to 
arrange  a  book  that  we 
think  is  sure  to  fill  all 
demands.  It  contains 
over  70  pages  of  illus- 
trations showing  all  the 
latest  blows,  posed  es- 
pecially for  this  book  under  the 
supervision  of  a  well-known  instruc- 
tor of  boxing,  who  makes  a  specialty 
if  teaching  and  knows  how  to  im- 
part his  knowledge.    Price   10  cents. 

\o.  165— The  Art  of  Fencing. 

This  is  a  new  book  by 
Ktgis  and  Louis  Senac, 
nf  New  York,  famous 
instructors  and  leading 
authorities  on  the  sub- 
ject. Messrs.  Senac  give 
in  detail  how  every 
move  should  be  made, 
and  tell  -  it  so  clearly 
chat  anyone  can  follow 
the      instructions.        Price    10    cents. 

No.    236— How    to   Wrestle. 

^Yithout  question  the 
most  complete  and  up- 
to-date  book  on  wrest- 
ling that  has  ever  been 
printed.  Edited  by  F. 
R.  Toombs,  and  devoted 
principally  to  special 
poses  and  illustrations 
by  George  H  a  c  k  e  n- 
schmidt,      the      "Russian 

Lion."     Price  10  cents. 

No.  102— Ground  Tumbling. 
By   Prof.   Henry  Walter 

Worth,       who      was      for 

years      physical     director 

"f    the    Armour    Institute 

of       Technology.        Any 

boy,       by      reading      this 

book     and    following     the 

instructions,    can    become 

proficient.  Price  10  cents. 

No.  28{>— Tumbling  for  Ama- 
teurs, This  book  was  special- 
ly compiled  for  the  use 
of  amateurs  by  Dr. 
James  T.  Gwathmey, 
director  of  the  Vander- 
bilt  University  Gymnas- 
ium. Nashville,  Tenn. 
Every  variety  of  the  pas- 
time is  explained  by 
text     and     pictures,     the 

latter  forming  a  very  important  fea- 
ture   of   the    book,    over    100   different 

positions  being  shown^     Price  10  eta. 


'^SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY /7^ 


YOUNG       i\ 
CORBETT  J  > 


full     page 


No.    191— How    to    Puncli    the 

^"^'  By     W.      H.     Rothwell 

("Young  Corbett").  This 
book  is  undoubtedly  the 
best  treatise  on  bag 
punching  that  has  ever 
been  printed.  Every  va- 
riety of  blow  used  in 
training  ia  shown  and 
explained.  The  pictures 
c  o  m  p  rise  thirty-three 
reproductions  of  Young 
Corbett  as  he  appears  while  at  work 
in  his  training  quarters.  The  photo- 
graphs were  taken  by  our  special  ar- 
tist and  cannot  be  seen  in  any  other 
publication.  Fancy  bag  punching  is 
treated  by  a  well-known  theatrical 
bag  puncher,  who  shows  the  latest 
tricks.     Price   10   cents. 

No.     143— Indian     Clnbs     and 
Dumb-Bells. 

Two  of  the  most  pop- 
ular forms  of  home  or 
gymnasium  exe  r  c  i  s  e. 
ITiis  book  is  written  by 
A  m  e  r  i  ca's  amateur 
champion  club  swinger, 
J.  H.  Dougherty.  It  is 
clearly  illustrated,  by 
which  any  novice  can 
become  an  expert.     Price     10    cents. 

No.    166— How    to    Swing    In- 
dian   Clubs. 

By  Prof.  B.  B.  War- 
man,  the  well-known  ex- 
ponent of  physical  cul- 
ture. By  following  the 
directions  carefully  any- 
one can  become  an  ex- 
pert.     Price   10  cents. 

No.   200— Dumb-Bells. 

This  is  undoubtedly 
the  best  work  on  dumb- 
bells that  has  ever  bet-n 
offered.  The  author, 
Mr.  G.  Bojus,  was  for- 
merly superintendent  of 
physical  culture  in  the 
Elizabeth  (N.  J.)  public 
schools,  instructor  at 
Columbia  University  (New 
York),  instructor  for  four  years  at 
the  Columbia  summer  school  and  is 
now  proprietor  of  the  Park  Place 
Gymnasium,  at  14  Park  Place,  New 
York  City.  The  book  contains  200 
photographs   of   all   the  various   exer- 

Icises  with  the  instructions  in  large, 
readable  type.  It  should  be  in  the 
hands  of  every  teacher  and  pupil  of 
!  physical  culture,  and  is  invaluable 
for  home  exercise.     Price  10  cents. 


No.    262— Medicine    Ball    Ex- 
ercises. 

This  book  is  not  a 
technical  treatise,  but  a 
series  of  plain  and  prac- 
tical exercises  with  the 
medicine  ball,  suitable 
for  boys  and  girls,  busi- 
ness and  professional 
men,  in  and  out  of  gym- 
nasium. Lengthy  ex- 
planation and  technical 
nomenclature  have  been  avoided  and 
illustrations  used  instead.  The  exer- 
cises are  fascinating  and  attractive, 
and  avoid  any  semblance  of  drud- 
gery. Edited  by  W.  J.  Cromie, 
physical  director  Germantown  (Pa.) 
Y.M.C.A.      Price   10  cents. 

No.  29— Pulley  Weight  Exer- 
cises. 

By  Dr.  Henry  S.  An- 
derson, instructor  in 
heavy  gymnastics  Yale 
gymnasium,  Ander  son 
Normal  School,  Chautau- 
iina  University.  In  con- 
junction with  a  chest 
njachine  anyone  with 
this  book  can  become 
perfectly    developed.    Price  10   cents. 

No.   283— Jiu   Jitsu. 

A  complete  description 
of  this  famous  Japanese 
system  of  self-defence. 
Each  move  thoroughly 
explained  and  illustrat- 
ed with  numerous  full- 
page  pictures  of  Messrs. 
A.  Minami  and  K.  Ko- 
yama,  two  of  the  most 
famous  exponents  of  the 
art  of  Jiu  Jitsu,  who  posed  espe- 
cially for  this  book.  Be  sure  and 
ask  for  the  Spalding  Athletic  Library 
liook  on  Jiu  Jitsu.     Price  10  cents. 


Group  XV. 

Gymnastics 

No.       104— The       Grading       of 
Gymnastic     Exercises. 

By  G.  M.  Martin,  I 
Physical  Director  of  the 
Y.  M.  C.  A.  of  Youngs- 
town,  Ohio.  It  is  a 
book  that  should  be  in 
the  hands  of  every  phy- 
sical director  of  the 
Y.  M.  C.  A,,  school, 
club,   college,   etc.      Price  10  cents. 


■i^  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LffiRARY/^ 


No.     214— Graded     Calisthen- 
ics and  Damb-Bell  Drills. 

By  Albert  B.  Weg- 
ener, Physical  Director 
Y.  M.  C.  A.,  Rochester, 
N.  Y.  Ever  since  graded 
apparatus  work  has 
been  used  in  gymnas- 
tics, the  necessity  of 
having  a  mass  drill  that 
would  harmonize  with  it 
has  been  felt.  For  years 
It  has  been  the  established  custom  in 
most  gymnasiums  of  memorizing  a 
set  drill,  never  varied  from  one 
year's  end  to  the  other.  Conse- 
quently the  beginner  was  given  the 
same  kind  and  amount  as  the  older 
member.  With  a  view  to  giving  uni- 
formity the  present  treatise  is  at- 
tempted.    Price  10  cents. 


No.    254— Barn  jam 
Bar    Bell    Drill. 

Edited  by  Dr.  R.  Tait 
McKenzie,  Director  Phy- 
sical Training,  Univer- 
sity of  Pennsylvania. 
Profusely  lllustr  a  t  e  d. 
Price  10  cents. 


No.  158— Indoor  and  Outdoor 
Gymnastic    Games. 

Without  question  one 
of  the  best  books  of  its 
kind  ever  published. 
Compiled  by  Prof.  A.  M. 
Chesley,  the  well-known 
Y.  M.  C.  A.  physical  di- 
rector. It  is  a  book 
that  will  prove  valuable 
to  indoor  and  outdoor 
gym  nasiums.  schools, 
outings  and  gatherings  where  there 
are  a  number  to  be  amused.  The 
games  described  comprise  a  list  of 
120,  divided  into  several  groups. 
Price   10  cents. 

No.    124— Ho\v    to    Become    a 
Gymnast. 

By  Robert  StoU,  of 
the  New  York  A.  C,  the 
American  champion  on 
the  flying  rings  from 
1885  to  1892.  Any  boy 
who  frequents  a  gym- 
nasium can  easily  fol- 
low the  illustrations  and 
Instructions  in  this  book 
and  with  a  little  prac- 
tice become  proficient  on  the  hori- 
«ontal  and  parallel  bars,  the  trapeze 
or  the   "horse."     Price  10  cents. 


No.     287— Fancy     Dumb     Bell 
and    Marcbing'    Drills. 

By  W.  J.  Cromie, 
Pliysical  Director  Ger- 
mantown  (Pa.)  Y.M. 
C.A.  The  author  says: 
All  concede  that  games 
and  recreative  exercises 
during  the  adolescent 
period  are  preferable  to 
set  drills  and  monoton- 
ous movements.  If  we 
can  introduce  this  game-and-play 
element  in  our  gymnastic  exercises, 
then  dumb  bells  will  cease  to  be  the 
boy's  nightmare,  and  he  will  look 
forward  with  expectancy  to  mass 
work  as  much  as  he  formerly  did  to 
"shooting  a  goal."  These  drills, 
while  designed  primarily  for  boys, 
can  be  used  successfully  with  girls 
and  men  and  women.  Profusely  il- 
lustrated.    Price   10  cents. 

Group  XVI.  cufture 

No.   161— Ten   Minutes'   Exer- 
cise  for   Busy   Men. 

By  Dr.  Luther  Halsey 
Gulick,  Director  of  Phy- 
sical Training  in  the 
New  York  public  schools. 
Anyone  who  is  looking 
for  a  concise  and  com- 
plete course  of  physical 
education  at  home  would 
do  well  to  procure  a 
copy  of  this  book.  Ten 
minutes'  work  as  directed  in  exercise 
anyone  can  follow.  It  already  has 
had  a  large  sale  and  has  been  highly 
recommended  by  all  who  have  fol- 
lowed its  instructions.     Price  10  cts. 

No,  208— Physical  Education 
and    Hygricne. 

This  is  the  fifth  of 
the  Physical  Training 
series,  by  Prof.  E.  B. 
Warman  (see  Nos.  142, 
149,  166,  185,  213,  261, 
290).  A  glance  at  the 
contents  will  show  the 
variety  of  subjects:  Chap- 
ter I — -Basic  principles; 
longevity.  Chapter  II — ■ 
Hints  on  eating;  food  values;  the 
uses  of  salt.  Chapter  III — Medicinal 
value  of  certain  foods.  Chapter  IV — 
The  efficacy  of  sugar;  sugar,  food 
for  muscular  work;  eating  for 
strength  and  endurance;  fish  as 
brain  food;  food  for  the  children. 
Chapter  V — Digesitibility;  bread;  ap- 
pendicitis due  to  flour,  etc.,  etc. 
Price   10  ceutSk 


g^  SPALDING  ATHLETIC  LmRARY/T" 


<^ 


No.  149— The  Care  of  the  Body. 

A  book  that  all  who 
value  health  should  read 
and  follow  its  instruc- 
tions. By  Prof.  B.  B. 
W  a  r  m  a  D,  the  well- 
known  lecturer  and  au- 
thority on  physical  cul- 
ture.   Price  10  cents. 

No.     142— Physical     Training 
Simplified. 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  War- 
man,  the  well-known 
physical  culture  expert. 
Is  a  complete,  thoroujih 
and  practical  book  where 
the  whole  man  is  con- 
sidered— brain  and  body. 
Price  10  cents. 

No.    185— Health    Hints. 

By  Prof.  f:.  p..  Warman. 
the  well-known  lecturer 
and  authority  on  physi- 
cal culture.  Prof.  War- 
man  treats  very  inter- 
estingly of  health  in- 
fluenced by  insulation; 
health  influenced  by  un- 
derwear; health  influenced 
by    color;   exercise.     Price  10  cent*. 

No.  213— 285  Health  ^.n^wers. 

By    prof.    B.  B.  Warman.   

Contents:  Necess  i  t  y 
for  exercise  in  the  sum- 
mer; three  rules  for  bi- 
cycling; when  going  up- 
hill; sitting  out  on  sum- 
mer nights;  ventilating 
a  bedroom;  ventilating  a 
house;  how  to  obtain 
I'ure  air;  bathing;  salt 
water  baths  at  home;  a 
substitute  for  ice  water;  to  cure  in 
Bomnia;   etc.   etc,     Price  10  cents. 

No.    238— Muscle   Baildingr. 

By  Dr.  L.  11.  Gulick, 
Director  of  Physi  c  a  1 
Training  in  the  New 
York  public  schools.  A 
complete  treatise  on  the 
correct  method  of  ac- 
(julring  strength.  Illus- 
trated.     Price    10   cents. 

No.   2.34— School    Tactics    and 
Maze     Running:. 

A  series  of  drills  for 
the  use  of  schools. 
Edited  by  Dr.  Luther 
Halsey  Gulick,  Director 
of  Physical  Training  in 
the  New  York  public 
Bcbools.      Price   10  cents. 


No.    261— Tensingr    Exercisea. 

By  Prof.  E.  B.  War- 
man,  and  uniform  with 
his  other  publications  on 
Scientific  Physical  Train- 
ing (see  Spalding's  Ath- 
letic Library  Nos.  142, 
149,  166,  185,  208.  213, 
29<;).  The  "Tensing"  or 
"Resisting"  system  of 
muscular  exercises  is  the 
most  thorough,  the  most  complete, 
the  most  satisfactory,  and  the  most 
fascinating    of    systems.  Price  10  cts. 

No.    285— Health;    by    Muscu- 
lar   Gymnastics. 

With  hints  on  Right 
Living.  By  W.  J. 
Cromie,  Physical  Direc- 
tor Germantown  (Pa.) 
Y.M.C.A.  The  author 
says:  "Seeing  the  great 
need  for  exercise  among 
the  ma.sses  and  knowing 
that  most  books  on  the 
subject  are  too  expen- 
sive or  too  difficult  to  comprehend, 
the  author  felt  it  his  privilege  to 
write  one  which  is  simple  and  the 
price  of  which  is  within  the  reach 
of  all.  If  one  will  practise  the 
exercises  and  observe  the  hints  there- 
in contained,  he  will  be  amply  re- 
paid for  so  doing."      Price  10  cents. 

No.  288— Indiiirestion  Treated 
by    Gymnastics 

By  W.  J.  Cromie, 
Physical  Director  Ger- 
mantown (Pa.)  Y.M. 
C.A.  This  book  deals 
with  the  causes,  symp- 
toms and  treatment  of 
constipation  and  indi- 
gestion. It  embraces 
diet,  water  cure,  menta 
culture,  massage  ana 
photographic  illustrations  of  exer- 
cises which  tend  to  cure  the  above 
diseases.  If  the  hints  therein  con- 
tained are  observed  and  the  exercises 
faithfully  performed,  most  forms  of 
the  above  diseases  will  be  helped, 
Price    10   cents. 

No.     290— Get     Well; 
Well. 

This  is  a  series  of 
chapters  by  Prof.  E.  B. 
Warman,  the  author  of 
a  number  of  books  in 
t  h  e  Spalding  Athletic 
Mbrary  on  physical  train- 
ing. The  subjects  are  all 
svritten  in  a  clear  and 
convincing  style.  Price 
10  cents. 


Keep 


m 


:=Da 


£^^30) 


SPALDING'S  ATHLETIC  LIBRARY 

Group  II      No.  300 


SPALDING'S 
HOW  TO  PLAY 
FOOT  BALL 

A  Primer  on  the  Modern  College  Game 
With  Tactics  Brought  Down  to  Date 

EDITED    BY 

WALTER    CAMP 

^  .  <*■ 

New  Edition  —  Revised  for  1907 


Published  by  the 

AMERICAN  SPORTS  PUBLISHING  COMPANY 

21    Warren  Street,   New  York 


=xXr 


Copyright.  1907 

BY 

American  Sports  Publishing  Company 
New  York 


CONTENTS 


The  All-America  Foot  Ball  Team  of  1906, 

All-America  Teams  from  1889  to  1906 

An  Introductory  Chapter  for  Beginners 

How  to  Play  Foot  Ball 

The  Forward  Pass  and  On-Side  Kick 

How  to  Play  Quarter-Back 

Play  of  the  Backs      . 

Signals  .  .      •      . 

Four-Men  Formation  Plays 

Training  for  Foot  Ball 

What  a  Foot  Ball  Player  Needs     . 


5 
14 
17 
29 

43 

S3 

71 

87 

106 

119 

123 


5^ 


«5-g?J5G 

rt-S-rt)  S'—M   WJi+tt!   P   Hh'T 

2  (D  a  S'^  '^  .<:  "^  P  o  o  ^ 


&'     "<         5   i-<   -I   O  y»7-(        "^ 


P  !=ft; 


Mj  >—  ►-.      c  «-• 

■o»^2  o'm  p  G 


B  — -^      ?      — »  rr^  P95 


9^  O-'^  O  9g   3 

3  H,^3^^-^  m 

—  CO   „.   C-m    n 


C^«  S«  CliO  O  3  C  o       i-< 

..  on>P(-t-"^CL^-<!o<^ 

.— r+-?'MP^r+3ai352 
0  3--.§^^^^^|g 


o^  3 


w 


'»p'S^^H'^E5^'^=:d' 
o5-S=«?a-S.jr«  3H- 

a"-^  B'x  M  S-r+o-2  p" 
s--.3ph^S-®  o  s-S-S 
re  rt-rt-o  3^recr35r'--a 

2  3  c;<5'hk3  ""  p  O-P  3 
g.^^o  t+S'S  "^  (t  lyi:!. 
^  w  3  Z. p":  a.3  p  S  ?r 
53505,re  35  3-3  |-a<»2 


a. 

5 
FT 

' 

160  FEET 

CC CT    AIM 

. 

5 
FT 

oori.9  11^.         1        p         w 

01   1.  ^IM. 

- 



-80 

FEET 

ao^ 

^ 

80 

FEET 



r 

t-* 

F^ 

tc 

CO 

CO 

rf^ 

rfi. 

§ 

(a) 

CO 

0 

m 

, 

■i 

0 

CO 

0 

y 

0 

en 

0 

_ 

GO 

AL 

T-J 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


THE   AI  ,1 -AMERICA   FOOT 
BAI,I,  TEAM,  1906 

BY    WALTER    CAMP. 
Copyright,  1906,  by  P.  F.  Collier  &  Sou. 

r*1 

SSIIHtlSSIIS 

First  Eleven.  Second  Eleven.  Third  Eleven. 

End Forbes,  Yale.  Dague,  Annapolis.  Levene,  Pennsylvania. 

Tackle Biglow,  Yale.  Draper,  Pennsylvania.  Weeks,  West  Point. 

Guard Burr,  Harvard.  Ziegler,  Pennsylvania.  Kersberg,  Harvard. 

Center Dunn,  Penn.  State.  Hockenberger,  Yale.  Hunt,  Indians. 

Guard Thompson,  Cornell,  Dillon,  Princeton.  Christy,  West  Point. 

Tackle Cooney,  Princeton.  Osborn,  Harvard.  Northcroft,  Annapolis. 

End Wister,  Princeton.  Marshall,  Minnesota.  Exendine,  Indians. 

Quarter Eckersall,  Chicago.  Jones,  Yale.  E.  Dillon,  Princeton. 

Half-back  .Mayhew,  Brown.  Hollenback,  Penn.  Morse,  Yale. 

Half-back.. Knox,  Yale.  Wendell,  Harvard.  Manier,  Vanderbilt. 

Full-back . .  Veeder,  Yale.  McCormick,  Princeton.  Garrels,  Michigan. 

The  foot  ball  season  of  1906  proved  conclusively  that  possession 
of  the  ball  had  become  too  valuable  under  the  old  rules.  Owing 
to  the  improvement  of  the  attack  by  concentrated  mass  plays, 
a  first-class  team  under  the  five-yard  rule  could  push  its  way 
two  to  three  yards  at  a  time  for  half  the  length  of  the  field  to  a 
touchdown.  The  fact  that  this  was  possible  made  it  poor  foot  ball 
policy  to  attempt  a  run  on  the  wings  or  open  play  with  the 
risk  of  losing  the  ball.  The  ten-yard  rule  requiring  double  the 
distance  to  be  gained  in  three  downs  forced  open  play  at  once. 
One  would  hardly  risk  a  forward  pass  when  he  had  the  old  five- 
yard  rule.  The  changes  have  worked  out  to  give  us  a  game 
pleasing  to  the  spectator,  lessening  the  number  of  injuries,  less 
exhausting  on  the  players,  and  admitting  of  greater  strategy  and 
less  dependence  upon  brawn. 

And  the  point  above  all  to  be  borne  in  mind  is  the  excellent 
balance  of  the  various  departments  of  the  play.  A  game  all 
kicking  would  speedily  pall ;  a  game  where  the  ball  was  thrown 
indiscriminately  all  over  the  field  would  soon  lack  interest ;  a 
game  that  was  all  end  runs  and  no  attacks  upon  the  middle  of 
the  line  would  become  monotonous.  The  game  as  it  stands  is 
balanced  by  these  various  plays  in  a  way  that  not  even  the  most 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


expert  coach  could  have  foreseen,  and  it  gives 
all  kinds  of  men  an  opportunity.  The  light, 
active  dodger  is  sought  after,  but  he  has  not 
wholly  supplanted  the  big,  powerful  man  for 
the  middle  of  the  line.  The  heavyweight 
who  may  be  too  clumsy  for  other  sports  may 
be  just  the  bulwark  for  the  middle  of  the  line 
and  need  not  be  abandoned  for  the  greater 
activity  of  the  small  man.  A  fast  man  and  a 
good  kicker  are 
necessities ;  the 
long  passer  is 
coming  into  great 
demand ;  there 
must  be  one  abso- 
lutely sure  catcher 
of  punts ;  there 
should   be    a   drop 


Forlirs,  Y;.I 
End 


or     place     kicker; 

the     majority     o  f 

the    men    must    be 

good    t  a  c  k  1  e  r  s, 

and     altogether 

any     weakness     of 

any    kind    in    any 

department   of  the 

game    is    likely    to 

prove   disastrous   to   the   team    exhibiting  that 

weakness. 

-Having  secured  a  game  as  well  balanced  as 
this,  the  public  and  authorities  will  be  right- 
fully unwilling  to  risk  its  loss  through  retro- 
gression or  experimentation.  Less  distance  to 
be  gained  in  three  down  will  mean  a  return 
to  mass  plays.  Greater  freedom  of  the  for- 
ward pass  will  make  that  pass  a  matter  of 


Biglow,  Yale 
Tackle 


Burr,   Harvard 
Guard 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


luck  instead  of  specific  skill  on  the  part  of 
the  passer  and  the  man  who  is  to  catch  the 
ball.  Besides,  by  taking  off  the  restrictions 
we  should  run  the  risk  of  bringing  back  the 
mass  plays  on  tackle  by  the  forcing  back  of 
still  another  man  on  the  defense.  This  would 
weaken  the  line  to  such  an  extent  that  mass 
plays  might  quite  possibly  yield  the  necessary 
gains.  The  general  desire  is  to  have  the  rules 
crystallize,  to  permit  them  to  exhibit  such 
further  possibilities  as  they  may  offer,  and  take 
no  chance,  by  starting  alterations,  of  disturbing 
the  present  balance. 

That  seems  to  be  the  lesson  of  the  season, 
but  in  order  to  keep  it  before  the  mind  it 
ought  to  be  pressed  home  with  emphasis. 

A    FAMOUS    ELEVEN. 

In  December,  1889,  the  writer,  in  a  weekly 
publication  issued  in  New 
York,  described  what  he 
called,  for  lack  of  a  better 
title,  "The  All-America 
Foot  Ball  Team."  It  may 
be  of  interest  to  note  the 
men  who  formed  that  first 
collection  of  star  players,  and  whom  he  re- 
garded as  the  best  eleven  men  in  their  posi- 
tions : 

Ends — Stagg     of     Yale     and     Cumnock     of 
Harvard. 

Tackles — ^Cowman  of  Princeton  and  Gill  of 
Yale. 

Guards — Heffelfinger  of  Yale  and  Cranston 
of  Harvard. 

Center — George  of  Princeton. 
Quarter-back — Poe  of  Princeton, 
Half-backs — Lee  of  Harvard  and  Channing 
of  Princeton. 

Full-back — Ames  of  Princeton. 
This,  then,  was  the  first  All-America  team. 
and,    in    spite    of   the    annual    list    of    players 
selected   by  the   writer   during   the  years   that 
have    followed,    surely    those    who    remember         Thompson,  Cornell 
these  men  would  be  delighted  to  see  them  as  Guard 


Dunn,  Penn.  State 
Center 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


they  were  in  that  day  take  part  in  the  present 
game  of  1906,  and  many  believe  that  that  team, 
even  against  stars  of  to-day,  would  quite  hold 
its  own. 

Since  those  days  the  number  of  candidates 
for  teams  and  the  number  of  men  in  the  squad 
have  grown  to  such  an  extent  that  it  is  ad- 
mitted by  all  that  no  first-class  team  would  for 
a  minute  think  themselves  equipped  with  less 
than  thirty  available  men.  Hence,  in  the  selec- 
tion of  a  national  team  one  ought  not  to  be 
satisfied  with  a  lesser  number,  particularly 
inasmuch  as  on  almost  all  the  teams  this  year 
men  are  not  graded  as  first  and  second  eleven 
men,  and  it  is  often  a  question  between  two 
men  which  shall  be  put  in  first  and  which 
take  his  place  later  in  the  game.  In  almost  all 
the  big  universities  three  complete  elevens  are 
carried  through  the  season,  and  for  this  reason 
the      writer      has      annually  _ 

■  selected  three  elevens  to 
make  up  the  team,  and  he 
might  as  a  coach  of  such  a 
national  team  put  in  under 
certain  conditions  a  man 
named    in    the    third    rather 

than  a  man  named  in  the  first  for  some  par- 
ticular  work  required  on   the   occasion. 

Forbes  of  Yale  proved  himself  an  ideal  end 

under    the    present    rules.      He    had    been    the 

fastest  tackle  on  the  gridiron  in  getting  down 

the   field    on    kicks.      With    all    his    speed    he 

weighed  as  much  as  any  ordinary  guard,  and, 

although    at    times     the    momentum     of    his 

weight   caused   him   to   overrun   his   mark,   no 

back  was  strong  enough  to  push  him  off  when 

once  he  reached  his  man.     His  defensive  work 

was    good   throughout,    while    on    the    offence 

no  better  man  could  have  been  chosen  to  go 

back  of  the  line  and  lead  the  backs  or  plunge 

himself.  ' 

He  was  not  used  in  the  Princeton  game  to 

carry  the  ball  until  the  second  half,  but  when 

he  was  sent  had  little  difficulty  in  making  his  Wister,  Princeton 

distance.    And  when  he  stood  in  the  gap  mask-  End 


Cooney,  Princeton 
Tackle 

Copyright  by  B.  F.  McManuB, 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC     LILRAUY. 


ing  play  for  Linn  and  the  other  backs  in  the 
latter  part  of  the  Harvard  contest  he  showed 
his  broad  conception  of  the  play. 

Wister  of  Princeton  was  good  in  all-round 
end  work,  tackling,  and  getting  down  the  field, 
thoroughly  reliable,  and  in  addition  to  this 
was  a  particularly  graceful  and  clean  handler 
of  the  forward  pass.  The  Princeton  system 
on  the  forward  pass  did  not  clear  away  the 
opponents  for  the  runner  as  did  Yale's,  but  in 
spite  of  this  Wister,  by  his  ability  to  catch  the 
ball  on  a  run  when  haff-way  turned,  made  him- 
self particularly  valuable. 

He  was  well  built,  and  had  been  rather 
saved  out  from  foot  ball  until  he  should  secure 
his  mature  strength,  and.  being  clever  and 
adaptable,  he  picked  up  the  game  with  ex- 
treme rapidity  this  year. 

Of  the  other  ends  that  should  be  noted  and  who 
would,  save  in  such  star  com- 
pany, have  been  All-America 
"ends,  are  Alcott  of  Yale, 
Parry  of  Chicago,  Scarlett  of 
Pennsylvania,  Starr  of  Har- 
vard, Blake  of  Vanderbilt, 
and  Hoagland  of  Princeton. 
Bigelow  of  Yale,  as  a  tackle,  needs  no  intro- 
duction to  lovers  of  the  sport.  Absolutely 
steady,  never  caught  napping,  quiet,  determined 
and  powerful,  he  wa''  the  star  man  of  the  year 
for  the  position.  He  was  /ery  fast  in  getting 
down  the  field,  certain  in  his  tackling,  and  in 
his  defensive  work  a  very  hard  man  for  in- 
terferers  to  get  out  of  thj  way.  His  style  was 
not  at  all  showy;  there  was  no  great  rush 
when  he  started  forward,  but  somehow  or 
other  he  always  managed  to  keep  going 
straight  at  the  runner  in  spite  of  interference, 
and  usually  reached  him.  Bigelow  adapted 
himself  to  the  new  game  with  remarkable  ' 
facility,  particularly  in  the  way  of  taking  on- 
side  kicks  and  forward  passes.  He  was  a 
student  of  the  bound  of  the  ball  far  beyond 
that  of  any  other  tackle  of  the  year.     In  the  Veeder,  Yale 

Harvard  game,  after  blocking  the  kick,  he  did  Full-back 


Eckersall,  Chicago 
Quarter-back 


10 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


not  secure  the  ball  for  what  looked  like  a 
certain  touchdown.  The  chances  were  that 
the  ball  would  strike  on  its  end  and  come  up 
to  the  desired  height  for  him  to  run  on  with 
it.  He  gave  it  every  chance  to  do  this,  but 
finding  it  still  lying  fiat  was  obliged  to  fall 
on  it. 

Cooney  of  Princeton  was  better  than  last 
year,  owing  to  better  physical  condition  and 
less  of  the  worries  of  captaincy.  Always  a 
stalwart  man  in  defence,  he  proved  excep- 
tionally good  in  that  respect  this  year  and 
made  good  openings  for  his  men  through 
which  to  come.  He  was  also  an  able  assistant 
to  Captain  Dillon  in  judgment,  and  his  ex- 
perience of  the  former  season  v/as  particularly 
valuable  in  this  respect.  Furthermore,  he  was 
on  the  watch  always  when  his  side  was  on 
the  offensive  to  see  "that  nobody  broke  through 
between  him  and  guard  and 
followed  up  the  play.  Many 
tackles  have  been  careless 
in  this  respect,  and  it  has 
been  expensive  for  their 
team.  It  was  he  who  in 
the  second  half  of  the  Cor- 
nell game  became  the  bulwark  of  defence  to 
his  team  by  his  solution  of  certain  parts  of  the 
Cornell  attack,  and  he  it  was  who  did  much 
to  check  Yale's  assault  later  in  the  year. 

SOME   OF   THE   GOOD  LINE    MEN. 

Among  the  tackles  outside  of  those  named 
in  the  teams  above,  Horr  of  Syracuse  comes 
very  close,  and  at  times  was  competent  to  dis- 
place some  of  them. 

Pullen  of  West  Point,  had  he  not  met  with 
an  accident,  would  undoubtedly  have  made  the 
position.  Wauseka  of  the  Indians  was  another 
most  reliable  man,  and  Paige  of  Yale,  in  spite 
of  its  being  his  first  season,  showed  splendid 
capabilities. 

Burr  of  Harvard,  as  stated  in  these  columns 
last  year,_  and  as  practically  confessed  by  all 
critics  this  year,  is,  in  addition  to  his  punting 


W- 


Mayhew,  Brown 
Half-back 


,„•#* 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  11 

ability,  a  first-class  guard.  He  played  the  position  well.  He 
is  powerful,  active,  has  foot  ball  sense,  and  can  be  relied  upon  to 
extend  himself  to  his  limit  no  matter  what  the  odds  may  be 
against  him.  When  to  all  this  is  added  his  ability  as  a  distance 
kicker,  it  is  no  wonder  that  he  is  regarded  as  an  especially  valu- 
able man. 

In  the  Yale  game  he  repeatedly  took  passes  which  came  from 
his  center  rolling  along  the  ground,  and  in  spite  of  every  handi- 
cap managed  to  get  the  ball  up  and  get  it  off  for  his  kick  without 
being  blocked.  Any  one  of  these  poor  passes  might  have  lost 
an  ordinary  game,  and  there  would  have  been  no  fault  found  with 
the  kicker  had  he  failed  to  get  the  ball  off.  Burr  handled  each 
one  of  them  well,  just  as  he  did  last  year,  only  under  even 
more  adverse  conditions.  He  kicks  a  long  ball  and  gets  it 
high  enough  so  that  his  ends  can  cover  a  good  portion  of  the 
kick. 

Thompson  of  Cornell  was  probably  the  most  powerful  guard 
playing  on  the  gridiron  this  year,  and  in  the  game  against  Prince- 
ton, when  they  put  the  plays  across  and  over  him  and  out  on 
his  wing,  Cornell  went  through  the  Princeton  team  without  diffi- 
culty, and  in  this  attack  eventually  secured  a  touchdown.  It 
was  this  very  ability  of  Thompson  that  led  to  Cornell's  final 
undoing  at  Pennsylvania  when  her  team  had  the  ball  on  the 
very  goal  line,  and  yet  in  several  trials  were  unable  to  put  it 
over.  They  sent  their  plays  up  into  the  center,  where  they 
thought  they  could  rely  upon  the  power  of  Thompson.  But  no 
man  is  good  enough  to  do  all  the  work,  and  particularly  not  in 
the  present  game,  if  the  opponents  know  that  he  is  to  be  selected 
to  do  it.  Not  a  Heffelfinger  or  a  Hare  could  break  through  or 
force  back  a  line  which  had  been  warned  in  advance  of  that  one 
particular  spot. 

Of  the  guards,  Erwin  and  Brides  of  Yale  were  a  fine  pair,  and 
could  hold  their  own  in  any  company,  as  could  also  Krueger  and 
Krider  of  Swarthmore,  Pevear  of  Dartmouth,  Stannard  of 
Princeton,  and  Dillon  c  f  the  Indians. 

Dunn  of  Penn.  State  was  the  best  center  of  the  season,  and 
it  was  he  who  led  his  team  to  such  remarkable  results,  a  good 
deal  of  it  depending  upon  Dunn  himself.  He  weighs  just  under 
two  hundred,  is  something  over  six  feet  in  height,  and  absolutely 
reliable  in  his  passing,  secure  in  blocking,  active  in  breaking 
through,  and  in  diagnosing  pl^ys.  He  was  a  stumbling-block  to 
Yale,  and  proved  to  be  a  similar  difficult  proposition  for  all  the 
teams  that  met  Penn.  State.  Some  idea  of  his  record  and  accom- 
plishments may  be  gathered  from  the  fact  that  his  team'  was 
never  scored  upon  save  by  Yale,  although  their  schedule  included 


12  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

games  with  Yale,  Carlisle  Indians,  and  the  Navy.  Captain 
Dunn's  team  defeated  the  Carlisle  Indians,  and  performed  a 
similar  feat  with  the  Navy.  He  persistently  broke  through  and 
blocked  kicks.  Able  to  run  the  hundred  inside  of  eleven  seconds, 
he  was  down  under  his  own  side's  kicks  with  the  ends.  Beyond 
all  and  giving  him  added  worth  was  his  earnestness  of  purpose 
and  character. 

Of  other  strong  centers,  there  were  Parker  of  Harvard,  whose 
only  weakness  was  occasional  poor  passes  for  kicks,  Newman  of 
Cornell,  Stone  of  Vanderbilt,  Sultan  of  West  Point,  and  Dwyer  of 
Pennsylvania. 

Eckersall  of  Chicago,  in  a  season  when  drop-kicking  has  been 
most  valuable,  possessed  the  same  abilities  of  the  quarter-back 
which  gave  him  the  position  last  year,  and  in  addition,  even  to 
greater  perfection,  the  qualities  of  a  drop-kicker.  Unfortunately, 
in  one  or  two  of  his  games,  the  field  was  a  sea  of  mud,  and  it 
was  impossible  for  any  one  to  bring  off  these  kicks,  but,  outside 
of  O'Brien  of  Swarthmore,  he  has  been  the  only  drop-kicker 
who  has  been  a  really  consistent  menace  to  the  opposing  goals. 
In  his  last  game — that  with  Nebraska — he  kicked  no  less  than 
five.  But  it  is  the  combination  of  qualities  thaf  entitles  him  to  the 
place  rather  than  any  one  excellence.  He  is  a  good  general,  and 
like  Jones  of  Yale  can  get  his  work  out  of  his  team;  he  is  a 
wonderful  punter,  kicking  as  far  as  Burr,  and  with  Veeder's 
accuracy;  he  is  a  deadly  tackier,  about  the  only  man  I  ever  saw 
who  knew  just  how  to  reach  a  man  like  Heston  in  a  broken 
field,  and  he  can  run  back  a  kick  with  "Eddie"  Dillon  of 
Princeton. 

^  The  quarter-back  position  has  been  one  in  which  it  is  par- 
ticularly hard  to  make  a  selection.  There  have  been  many  this 
season  who  would  have  eclipsed  the  stare  of  other  years.  Beyond 
those  noted  in  the  above  All-America  team,  there  are  Norton 
of  the  Navy,  who  showed  excellent  judgment  in  running  his 
team ;  O'Brien  of  Swarthmore,  probably,  outside  of  Eckersall, 
the  best  drop-kicker  on  the  gridiron ;  Schwartz  of  Brown,  a 
clever  performer;  Libby  of  the  Indians,  a  sure  catcher;  and 
Lawrence  of  Pennsylvania,  who  with  such  short  experience 
developed  into  a  capable  general. 

Mayhew  of  Brown  was  the  most  remarkable  half-back  of  the 
year,  and  gave  more  trouble  to  opposing  teams  than  anybody 
else,  particularly  when  one  considers  the  games  in  which  he 
played.  He  was  very  fast,  quick  at  seeing  his  opportunity,  and 
a  sure  handler  of  the  ball,  and,  on  the  whole,  first  class  in  every 
department  of  the  play.  His  tackling  was  strong,  sharp  and  clean, 
and  he  had  the  keenest  of  eyes  for  the  ball. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  13 

Knox  of  Yale  made  longer  runs  against  the  strongest  defensive 
teams  than  any  other  man  on  the  gridiron.  It  was  he  who  ran 
more  than  half  the  length  of  the  field  through  the  Brown  team, 
and  performed  a  similar  feat  against  West  Point  as  well  as  in 
Yale's  final  game  of  the  year,  that  with  Harvard.  Against  a 
team  which  was  at  the  top  of  its  game,  Knox  went  from  the 
middle  of  the,  field  in  spite  of  attempted  tackles  down  almost  to 
the  goal  line,  only  being  finally  stopped  by  Wendell  from  behind. 
It  was  Knox  also  who  did  the  sure  catching  of  punts  for  Yale 
in  the  Princeton  game,  and  he  was  the  man  who,  standing  alone 
between  the  runner  and  Yale's  goal  line,  stopped  Dillon  of 
Princeton  when  he  was  making  a  run  almost  as  good  as  that 
which  Knox  later  made  in  the  Harvard  game.  He  was  an  excel- 
lent performer  of  the  on-side  kick  in  its  most  approved  fashion. 

FAST  MEN  BEHIND  THE  LINE. 

The  field  of  half-backs  was  an  exceptional  one,  and  most  of 
the  teams  which  had  first  and  second  strings  had  some  difficulty 
in  selecting  their  men. 

Linn  of  Yale  was  one  of  the  stars  in  the  second  half  of  both 
Yale's  games.  Roome  of  Yale,  incapacitated  through  a  large 
portion  of  the  season  by  injury,  was  unable  to  do  himself  justice. 

Harlan  and  Roulon-Miller  of  Princeton  were  both  first  class, 
as  were  also  Hubbard  of  Amherst,  Chalmers  of  Lafayette,  Greene 
and  Farwell  of  Pennsylvania,  and  Mount  Pleasant  of  the  Indians, 
also  Gibson  of  Cornell  and  Bomar  of  Yale. 

Hill  of  West  Point,  Spencer  of  the  Navy,  and  Curtiss  of  Brown 
all  come  in  for  a  good  share  of  praise. 

Veeder  of  Yale  was  the  best  forward  passer  (a  province  of 
especial  importance  in  the  game  this  year)  seen  on  the  field 
during  the  season.  It  was  he  who,  with  one  long  sweep  of  his 
arm,  placed  Yale  within  scoring  distance  both  in  the  Harvard 
and  Princeton  games.  He  concealed  his  eventual  intention  well, 
took  plenty  of  time,  and  could  deliberately  hurl  the  ball  for  a 
considerable  distance  and  with  remarkable  accuracy. 

Besides  that,  he  was  a  long-distance  and  very  accurate  punter 
and  a  sure  catcher  of  punts.  He  did  all  this  work  for  his  team 
in  the  Harvard  game,  and  not  only  caught  the  ball  with  cer- 
tainty, but  usually  managed  to  dodge  the  first  man  on  his  run 
back. 

His  kicking  out  from  his  own  goal  when  his  team  had  twice 
been  penalized  was  as  cool  a  piece  of  work  as  has  been  seen 
during  the  season,  and  upon  that  steadiness  depended  the  result. 

Among  the  other  backs,  Sieber  of  Gettysburg  stood  out 
strongly,  as  did  Peterson  of  Tufts  and  Wolder  of  Cornell. 


14 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


ALL-AMERICA  TEAMS  FROM  1889  TO  1906. 


1889 
Cumnock,  Harvard. 
Cowan,     Princeton. 
Cranston,    Harvard. 
George,    Princeton. 
Heffelflnger,    Yale. 
Gill,    Yale. 
Stagg,     Yale. 
Poe,    Princeton. 
Lee,    Harvard. 
Channing,     Princeton. 
Ames,    Princeton. 


1890 
Hallowell,    Harvard. 
Newell,    Harvard. 
Riggs,    Princeton. 
Cranston,    Harvard. 
Heffelflnger,    Yale. 
Rhodes,    Yale. 
Wcrren,     Princeton. 
Dean,     Harvard. 
Corbett,    Harvard. 
McClung,    Yale. 
Homans,    Princeton. 


1891 
Hinkey,    Yale. 
Winter,    Yale. 
Heffelflnger,     Yale. 
Adams,     Pennsylvania 
Riggs,    Princeton. 
Newell,    Harvard. 
Hartwell,    Yale. 
King,    Princeton. 
Lake,    Harvard. 
McClung,    Yale. 
Homans,     Princeton. 


1892 
Hinkey,    Yale. 
Wallis,    Yale. 
Waters,     Harvard. 
Lewis,    Harvard. 
Wheeler,     Princeton. 
Newell,    Harvard. 
Hallowell,     Harvard. 
McCormick,    Yale. 
Brewer,    Harvard. 
King,    Princeton. 
Thayer,    Pennsylvania. 


1893 
Hinkey,     Yale. 
Lea,    Princeton. 
W'heeler,    Princeton. 
Lewis,    Harvard. 
Hickok,     Yale. 
Newell,    Harvard. 
Trenchard,     Princeton. 
King,    Princeton. 
Brewer,    Harvard. 
Morse,    Princeton. 
Butterworth,     Yale. 


1894 
Hinkey,    Yale. 
Waters,    Harvard. 
W^heeler,     Princeton. 
Stillman,    Yale. 
Hickok,    Yale. 
Lea,    Princeton. 
Gelbert,    Pennsylvania 
Adoe,    Yale. 
Knipe,    Pennsylvania. 
Brooke,    Pennsylvania. 
Butterworth,    Yale. 


1895 
Cabot,     Harvard. 
Lea,    Princeton. 
Wharton,    Pennsylvania. 
Bull,     Pennsylvanfa. 
Riggs,    Princeton. 
Murphy,   Yale. 
Gelbert.    Pennsylvania. 
Wyckoff,    Cornell. 
Thorne,     Yale. 
Brewer,    Harvard. 
Brooke,    Pennsylvania. 


1896 
Cabot,    Harvard. 
Church,    Princeton. 
Wharton,    Pennsylvania. 
Gailey,    Princeton. 
Woodruff,    Pennsylvania. 
Murphy,     Yale. 
Gelbert,     Ptninsylvania. 
Fincke,    Yale. 
Wrightington,     Harvard. 
Kelly,    Princeton. 
Baird,    Princeton. 


1897 
Cochran,     Princeton. 
Chamberlain,    Yale. 
Hare,     Pennsylvania. 
Doucette,    Harvard. 
Brown,    Yale. 
Outland,     Pennsylvania 
Hall,    Yale. 
DeSaulles,     Yale. 
Dibblee,    Harvard. 
Kelly,    Princeton. 
Minds,    Pennsylvania. 


Palmer,    Princeton. 
Hillebrand,    Princeton. 
Hare,    Pennsylvania. 
Overfield,    Pennsylvania. 
Brown,    Yale. 
Chamberlain,     Yale. 
Hallowell,     Harvard. 
Daly,    Harvard. 
Outland,     Pennsylvania. 
Dibblee,    Harvard. 
Hirschberger,    Chicago. 


Campbell,    Harvard. 
Hillebrand,     Princeton. 
Hare,    Pennsylvania. 
Overfield.    Pennsylvania. 
Brown,    Yale. 
Stillman,    Yale. 
Poe,    Princeton. 
Daly,    Harvard. 
Seneca,    Indians. 
McCracken,    Pennsylvania. 
McBride,    Yale. 


1900 
Campbell,     Harvard. 
Bloomer,     Yale. 
Brown,    Yale. 
Olcott,   Yale. 
Hare,    Pennsylvania. 
Stillman,    Yale. 
Hallowell.   Harvard. 
Fincke,    Yale. 
Chadwick,    Yale. 
Morley,    Columbia. 
Hale.    Yale. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


16 


1901 
Campbell,    Harvard. 
Cutts,    Harvard. 
Warner,    Cornell. 
Holt,    Yale. 
Lee,    Harvard. 
Bunker,    West    Point. 
Davis,    Princeton. 
Daly,   West   Point. 
Kernan,    Harvard. 
Weekes,    Columbia. 
Graydon,    Harvard. 


1902 
Shevlin,    Yale. 
Hogan,     Yale. 
DeWitt,    Princeton. 
Holt,    Yale. 
Glass,    Yale. 
Kinney,    Yale. 
Bowditch,     Harvard. 
Rockwell,    Yale. 
Chadwick,    Yale. 
Bunker,    West    Point. 
Graydon,     Harvard. 


1903. 
Henry,    Princeton. 
Hogan,    Yale. 
DeWitt,    Princeton. 
Hooper,    Dartmouth. 
A.    Marshall,    Harvard. 
Knowlton,     Harvard. 
Rafferty,    Yale. 
Johnson,    Carlisle. 
Heston,    Michigan. 
Kafer,     Princeton. 
Smith,  Columbia. 


1904 
Shevlin,   Yale. 
Cooney,   Princeton. 
Piekarski,   Pennsylvania. 
Tipton,  West  Point. 
Kinney,   Yale. 
Hogan,   Yale. 
Eckersall^  Chicago. 
Stevenson,  Pennsylvania. 
Hurley,   Harvard. 
Heston,   Michigan. 
Smith,   Pennsylvania. 


1905 
Shevlin,  Yale. 
Lamson,  i'tmsylvania. 
Tripp,  Yale. 
Torrey,  Pennsylvania. 
Burr,  Harvard. 
Squires,  Harvard. 
Glaze,  Dartmouth. 
Eckersall,  Chicago. 
Uuome,  Yale. 
Iluhhard.  Amherst. 
McCormick,  Princeton. 


1906 
Forbes,  Yale. 
Biglow,  Yale. 
Burr,  Harvard. 
Dunn,  Penn  State. 
Thompson,  Cornell. 
Cooney,  Princeton. 
Wister,  Princeton. 
Eckersall,  Chicago. 
Mayhew,  Brown. 
Knox,  Yale. 
Veeder,  Yale, 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY 


17 


AN  INTRODUCl  DRY  CHAPTER 
FOR  BEGINNERS 

BY    WALTER    CAMP. 

nossimiisti 

Those  who  are  taking  up  the  sport  for  the  first  time  should 
observe  certain  rules  which  will  enable  them  to  become  adept 
players  with  less  mistakes  than  perhaps  would  otherwise  fall  to 
their  lot.  i 

A  beginner  in  foot  ball  should  do  two  things :  He  should  read 
the  rules,  and  he  should,  if  possible,  watch  the  practice.  If  the 
latter  be  impossible,  he  and  his  men  must,  after  having  read  the 
rules,  start  in  and,  with  eleven  on  a  side,  play  according  to  their 
own  interpretation  of  these  rules.  When  differences  of  opinion 
arise  as  to  the  meaning  of  any  rule,  a  letter  addressed  to  the 
publishers  of  Spalding's  Official  Foot  Ball  Guide — the  American 
Sports  Publishing  Company,  21  Warren  Street,  New  York — 
will  always  elicit  a  ready  and  satisfactory  answer. 

The  first  thing  to  be  done  in  starting  the  practice  is  to  provide 
the  accessories  of  the  game,  which,  in  foot  ball,  arc  of  the  simplest 
kind.  The  field  should  be  marked  out  with  ordinary  lime  lines, 
enclosing  a  space  of  330  feet  long  and  160  feet  wide.  While  not 
absolutely  necessary,  it  is  customary  to  mark  the  field  also  with 
transverse  lines  every  five  yards,  for  the  benefit  of  the  referee  in 
determining  how  far  the  ball  is  advanced  at  every  down,  and  also 
with  lines  running  parallel  to  the  side  line  and  five  yards  apart,  in 
order  to  aid  the  umpire  in  determining  that  a  forward  pass,  if 
made,  crosses  the  line  of  scrimmage  at  least  five  yards  out, 
also  whether  the  quarter-back  in  making  a  run  follows  a 
certain  rule  which  provides  that  he  must  cross  the  line  of 
scrimmage  five  yards  from  the  point  where  the  ball  was  put 
in  play.  The  same  end  is  accomplished  by  merely  making 
short  marks  at  right  angles  on  each  line.  In  the  middle  of 
the  lines  forming  the  ends  of  the  field,  the  goal  posts  are 
erected,  and  should  be  eighteen  feet  six  inches  apart,  with  cross- 
bar ten  feet  from  the  ground.  The  posts  should  project  several 
feet  above  the  cross  bar  The  ball  used  is  an  oval  leather  cover 
containing  a  rubber  inner,  which  is  inflated  by  means  of  a  small 
air  pump  or  the  lungs.     The  ball  used  by  the  principal  teams  is 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  19 

the  Intercollegiate  Match,  No.  J5,  adopted  by  the  Intercollegiate 
Association,  and  made  by  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bros. 

The  costumes  of  the  players  form  another  very  important 
feature  and  should  be  of  a  proper  and  serviceable  nature.  Canvas 
makes  most  serviceable  jackets  for  the  players,  as  do  also  jerseys 
reinforced  with  leather.  These  can  be  purchased  at  a  small 
expense  from  any  athletic  outfitter.  The  canvas  jacket  should 
fit  closely,  but  not  too  tightly,  and  lace  up  in  front,  so  that  it 
may  be  drawn  quite  snugly.  Some  have  elastic  pieces  set  in 
at  the  sides,  back  of  the  arms,  but  these  additions  are  by  no 
means  necessary.  Jerseys,  with  leather  patches  on  elbows  and 
shoulders,  are  also  worn. 

The  trousers  should  be  of  some  stout  material,  fustian  for 
example,  and  well  padded.  This  padding  can  be  done  by  any 
seamstress,  quilting  in  soft  material  over  knees  and  thighs,  or 
the  regular  athletic  outfitters  furnish  trousers  provided  with  the 
padding.  Long  woolen  stockings  are  worn,  and  not  infrequently 
shin  guards  by  men  playing  in  the  forward  line. 

The  most  important  feature  of  the  entire  uniform  is  the  shoe. 
This  may  be  the  ordinary  canvas  and  leather  base  ball  shoe  with 
leather  cross-pieces  nailed  across  the  sole  to  prevent  slipping. 
Such  is  the  most  inexpensive  form,  but  the  best  shoes  are  made 
entirely  of  leather,  of  moderately  stout  material,  fitting  the  foot 
firmly,  yet  comfortably,  lacing  well  up  on  the  ankles,  and  the 
soles  provided  with  a  small  leather  spike,  which  can  be  renewed 
when  worn  down.  Inside  this  shoe,  and  either  attached  to  the 
bottom  of  it  or  not,  as  preferred,  a  thin  leather  anklet  laces 
tightly  over  the  foot,  and  is  an  almost  £ure  preventive  of  sprained 
ankles. 

Head  gears  are  made  to  protect  the  runner  and  must  not  be 
composed  of  sole  leather,  papier  mache,  or  any  other  hard,  un- 
yielding substance  that  might  injure  another  player.  (A  com- 
plete list  of  a  foot  ball  player's  requirements  will  be  found  in  a 
subsequent  chapter  in  this  book.) 

Underneath  the  canvas  jacket  any  woolen  underwear  may  be 
put  on,  most  players  wearing  knit  jerseys.  As  mentioned  above, 
there  are  several  players  who  can,  to  advantage,  go  without  the 
regulation  canvas  jacket  and  wear  a  jersey  in  its  place.  These  are 
especially  the  quarter-back,  the  center-rush  or  snap-back.  Of 
recent  years  backs  and  linemen  tend  more  than  ever  to  the  adop- 
tion of  the  leather-reinforced  jersey. 

The  team  of  eleven  men  is  usually  divided  into  seven  rushers 
or  forwards,  who  stand  in  a  line  facing  their  seven  opponents ;  a 
quarter-back,  who  stands  just  behind  this  line;  two  half-backs, 
a  few  yards  behind  the  quarter-back;  and  finally,  a  full-back  or 
goal  tend,  who  stands  at  kicking  distance  behind  the  half-backs. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  21 

This  gives  the   general   formation,   but   is,  of  course,  dependent 
upon  the  plays  to  be  executed. 

Before  cornmencing  practice,  a  man  should  be  chosen  to  act  as 
referee,  umpire  and  linesman,  for  in  practice  games  it  is  hardly 
necessary  to  have  more  than  one  official.  The  two  sides  then 
toss  up,  and  the  one  winning  the  toss  has  choice  of  goal  or  kick- 
off.  If  there  be  a  wind,  the  winner  will  naturally  and  wisely  take 
the  goal  from  which  that  wind  is  blowing  and  allow  his  opponent 
to  have  the  ball.  If  there  be  no  advantage  in  the  goals  he  may 
choose  the  kick-off,  and  his  opponents  in  that  case  take  which- 
ever goal  they  like.  The  two  teams  then  line  up ;  the  holders  of 
the  ball  placing  it  upon  the  exact  center  of  the  field,  and  the 
opponents  being  obliged  to  stand  back  in  their  own  territory  at 
least  ten  yards,  until  the  ball  has  been  touched  with  the  foot. 
Some  man  of  the  side  having  the  kick-off  must  then  kick  the  ball 
at  least  ten  yards  into  the  opponents'  territory.  Preferably,  there- 
fore, he  will  send  it  across  the  goal  line  or  else  as  far  as  he  can, 
and  still  have  his  forwards  reach  the  spot  in  season  to  prevent 
too  great  headway  being  acquired  by  the  opponents'  interference, 
but  he  will  not  kick  it  across  the  side  line.  The  opponents  then 
catch  it  and  return  it  by  a  kick,  or  they  run  with  it.  If  one  of 
them  runs  with  it  he  may  be  tackled  by  the  opponents.  He  may 
not,  however,  be  tackled  below  the  knees,  save  by  the  five  middle 
men  of  the  forward  line.  As  soon  as  the  ball  is  fairly  held; 
that  is,  both  player  and  ball  brought  to  a  standstill,  or  the 
runner  with  the  ball  touches  the  ground  with  any  part  of  his 
person,  except  his  hands  or  feet,  while  in  the  grasp  of  an  op- 
ponent, the  referee  blows  his  whistle  and  the  runner  has  the 
bill  "down,"  and  someone  upon  his  side,  usually  the  man  called 
the  snap-back  or  center-rush,  must  place  the  ball  on  the  ground 
at  that  spot  for  a  "scrimmage,"  as  it  is  termed.  The  ball  is  then 
put  in  play  again,  placing  it  flat  on  the  ground  with  its  long  axis 
parallel  to  the  side  line  (while  the  men  of  each  team  keep  on 
their  own  side  of  the  ball,  under  the  penalty  of  a  foul  for  off- 
side play,  a  line  parallel  to  the  goal  line  and  passing  through  the 
end  of  the  ball  nearest  the  side's  own  goal  line  determining  the 
position  of  the  players  of  each  side)  by  the  snap-back's  kicking 
the  ball  or  snapping  it  back,  either  with  his  foot,  or  more  com.- 
monly  with  his  hands,  to  a  player  of  his  own  side  just  behind 
him,  who  is  called  the  quarter-back.  The  ball  is  in  play,  and 
both  sides  may  press  forward  as  soon  as  the  ball  is  put  in  motion 
by  the  snap-back.  Naturally,  however,  as  the  quarter-back  usually 
passes  it  still  further  behind  him  to  a  half-back,  or  back,  to  kick 
or  run  with,  it  is  the  opposing  side  which  is  most  anxious  to 
push  forward,  while  the  side  having  the  ball  endeavor  by  all 
lawful  means  to  retard  that  advance  until  their  runner  or  kicker 


^ 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  23 

has  had  time  to  execute  his  play.  It  is  this  antagonism  of  desire  on 
the  part  of  both  sides  that  has  given  rise  to  the  special  legislation 
regarding  the  use  of  the  hands,  body  and  arms  of  the  contestants 
— and  beginners  must  carefully  note  the  distinction.  As  soon  as 
the  snap-back  has  sent  the  ball  behind  him,  he  has  really  placed 
all  the  men  in  his  own  line  off-side;  that  is,  between  the  ball 
and  the  opponents'  goal,  and  they,  therefore,  can  theoretically, 
occupy  only  the  position  in  which  they  stand,  while  the  opponents 
have  the  legal  right  to  run  past  them  as  quickly  as  possible. 
For  this  reason,  and  bearing  in  mind  that  the  men  "on  side" 
have  the  best  claim  to  right  of  way,  it  has  been  enacted  that  the 
side  having  possession  of  the  ball  may  not  use  their  hands  or 
arms,  but  only  their  bodies,  when  thus  ofif-side,  to  obstruct  or 
interrupt  their  adversaries,  while  the  side  running  through  in  the 
endeavor  to  stop  the  runner,  or  secure  possession  of  the  ball, 
may  use  their  hands  and  arms  to  make  passage  for  themselves. 
The  game  thus  progresses  in  a  series  of  downs,  followed  by 
runs  or  kicks,  as  the  case  may  be,  the  only  limitation  being  that 
of  a  rule  designed  to  prevent  one  side  continuously  keeping 
possession  of  the  ball  without  any  material  advance  or  retreat, 
which  would  be  manifestly  unfair  to  the  opponents.  This  rule 
provides  that  in  three  "downs"  or  attempts  to  advance  the  ball, 
a  side  not  having  made  ten  yards  toward  the  opponents'  goal 
must  surrender  possession  of  the  ball.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  it 
is  seldom  that  a  team  actually  surrenders  the  ball  in  this  way, 
because,  after  two  attempts,  if  the  prospects  of  completing  the 
ten-yards  gain  appear  small,  it  is  so  manifestly  politic  to  kick  the 
ball  as  far  as  possible  down  the  field,  that  such  a  method  is 
more  likely  to  be  adopted  than  to  make  a  last  attempt  by  a  run 
and  give  the  enemy  possession  almost  on  the  spot.  In  such  an 
exigency,  if  a  kick  be  made,  the  rules  provide  that  it  must  be 
such  a  kick  as  to  give  the  opponents  fair  and  equal  chance  to 
gain  possession  of  the  ball  and  must  go  beyond  the  line  of 
scrimmage  unless  stopped  by  an  opponent.  A  player  may  also, 
under  certain  restrictions,  carefully  stated  in  the  rules,  make 
what  is  known  as  a  forward  pass,  that  is,  throw  the  ball  forward 
to  another  player  of  his  own  side.  There  is  one  other  element 
entering  into  this  progress  of  the  game,  and  that  is  the  fair 
catch.  This  can  be  made  from  a  kick  by  the  opponents,  pro- 
vided the  catcher  indicates  his  intention  by  raising  his  hand 
in  the  air,  takes  the  ball  on  the  fly,  and  no  other  of  his 
own  side  touches  it.  This  entitles  him  to  a  free  kick ;  that 
is,  his  opponents  cannot  come  within  ten  yards  of  the  spot 
where  he  made  the  catch,  while  he  (and  his  side)  may  re- 
tire   such    distance    toward    his    own    goal    as    he    sees    fit,    and 


-,!..»*  ««'„S 


i-mm^M. 


#  # 


^ 
t 


h' 


*  T^  ^, 


1— Action   plays   near   Princeton's   goal.      2 — A   tackle.      3— Punting. 
YALE-PRINCETON   GAME,    1906. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  25 

then  make  a  punt  or  a  drop,  or  give  the  ball  to  some  one  of  his 
own  side  to  place  the  ball  for  a  place  kick.  Here  again,  as  at 
kick-off,  when  taking  the  free  kick,  he  must  make  an  actual  kick 
of  at  least  ten  yards,  unless  the  ball  is  stopped  by  the  opponents. 
His  own  men  must  be  behind  the  ball  when  he  kicks  it,  or  be 
adjudged  off-side. 

Whenever  the  ball  goes  across  the  side  boundary  line  of  the 
field,  it  is  said  to  go  "into  touch,"  or  out  of  bounds,  and  it  must 
be  at  once  brought  back  to  the  point  where  it  crossed  the  line, 
and  then  put  in  play  by  some  member  of  the  side  which  carried 
it  out,  or  first  secured  possession  of  it  after  it  went  out.  The 
method  of  putting  it  in  play  is  to  take  it  to  the  spot  where  it 
crossed  the  line  and  then  carry  it  at  right  angles  into  the  field  at 
least  five  and  not  more  than  fifteen  yards,  and  make  an  ordinary 
scrimmage  of  it,  the  same  as  after  a  down.  The  player  who 
intends  walking  with  it  must,  before  stepping  into  the  field, 
declare  how  many  paces  he  will  walk  in,  in  order  that  the 
opponents  may  know  where  the  ball  will  be  put  in  play.  We 
will  suppose  that  the  ball  by  a  succession  of  these  plays,  runs, 
kicks,  forward  pass,  downs,  fair  catches,  etc.,  has  advanced 
toward  one  or  the  other  of  the  goals,  until  it  is  within  kicking 
distance  of  the  goal  posts.  The  question  will  now  arise  in  the 
mind  of  the  captain  of  the  attacking  side  as  to  whether  his  best 
plan  of  operation  will  be  to  try  a  drop-kick  at  the  goal,  or  to 
contmue  the  running  attempts,  in  the  hope  of  carrying  the  ball 
across  the  goal  line,  for  this  latter  play  will  count  his  side  a 
touchdown,  and  entitle  them  to  a  try-at-goal. 

In  deciding,  therefore,  whether  to  try  a  drop-kick,  or  continue 
the  running  attempts,  he  should  reflect  upon  the  value  of  the 
scores.  The  touchdown  itself  will  count  5  points,  even  if  he 
afterward  fail  to  convert  it  into  a  goal,  by  sending  the  ball  over 
the  bar  and  between  the  posts,  while,  if  he  succeed  in  converting 
it,  the  touchdown  and  goal  together  count  6  points.  A  drop- 
kick,  if  successful,  counts  4  points,  but  is,  of  course,  even  if 
attempted,  by  no  means  sure  of  resulting  successfully.  He  must, 
therefore,  carefully  consider  all  the  issues  at  this  point,  and  it 
is  the  handling  of  those  problems  that  shows  his  quality  as  a 
captain.  H  he  elects  to  continue  his  running  attempts,  and 
eventually  carries  the  ball  across  the  line,  he  secures  a  touch- 
down at  the  spot  where  the  ball  is  finally  held,  after  being  car- 
ried over,  and  any  player  of  his  side  may  then  bring  it  out,  and 
when  he  reaches  a  suitable  distance,  place  the  ball  for  one  of 
his  side  to  kick,  the  opponents,  meantime,  standing  behind  their 
goal  line.  In  placing  the  ball  it  is  held  in  the  hands  of  the 
placer,  close  to,  but  not  touching  the  ground,  and  then  carefully 
aimed  until  the  direction  is  proper;  the  kicker  himself  may  aim 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  27 

it,  touching  it  with  his  hands,  provided  the  ball  does  not  touch 
the  ground.  Then,  at  a  signal  from  the  kicker  that  it  is  right, 
it  is  placed  upon  the  ground,  still  steadied  by  the  hand  or  finger 
of  the  placer,  and  instantly  kicked  by  the  place  kicker.  The 
reason  for  this  keeping  it  off  the  ground  until  the  last  instant 
is  that  the  opponents  can  charge  forward  as  soon  as  the  ball 
touches  the  ground,  and  hence  would  surely  stop  the  kick  if 
much  time  intervened.  If  the  ball  goes  over  the  goal,  it  scores 
as  above  indicated,  and  the  opponents  then  take  it  to  the  middle 
of  the  field  for  kick-off  again,  the  same  as  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  match.  The  opponents  have  the  privilege  either  of 
taking  the  kick-off  themselves  or  of  having  the  side  which 
scored  kick-off.  The  ball  is  also  tahen  to  the  center  of  the  field 
if  the  goal  be  missed  after  a  touchdown,  although  formerly  the 
opponents  couk^  then  bring  it  out  only  to  the  twenty-five-yard 
line. 

There  is  one  other  issue  to  be  considered  at  this  point,  and 
that  is,  if  the  ball  be  in  possession  of  the  defenders  of  the  goal, 
or  if  it  fall  into  their  hands  when  thus  close  to  their  own  goal. 
Of  course,  they  will  naturally  endeavor,  by  running  or  kicking, 
to,  if  possible,  free  themselves  from  the  unpleasant  situation  that 
menaces  them.  Sometimes,  however,  this  becomes  impossible, 
and  there  is  a  provision  in  the  rules  which  gives  them  an  oppor- 
tunity of  relief,  at  a  sacrifice,  it  is  true,  but  scoring  less  against 
them  than  if  their  opponents  should  regain  possession  of  the  ball 
and  make  a  touchdown  or  a  goal,  A  player  may  at  any  time 
kick,  pass  or  carry  the  ball  across  his  own  goal  line,  and  there 
touch  it  down  for  safety.  This,  while  it  scores  two  points  for 
his  opponents,  give:  his  side  the  privilege  of  bringing  the  ball 
out  to  the  twenty- five-yard  line,  and  then  taking  a  kick-out,  per- 
formed like  kick-off  or  any  other  free  kick,  but  it  can  be  a  drop- 
kick,  a  place-kick  or  a  punt. 

The  succession  of  plays  continues  for  thirty-five  minutes  in  a 
regular  match.  Then  intervenes  a  ten-minute  intermission,  after 
which  the  side  which  did  not  have  the  kick-off  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  match  has  possession  of  the  ball  for  the  kick-off 
for  a  second  thirty-five  minutes.  The  result  of  the  match  is 
determined  by  the  number  of  points  scored  during  the  two  halves, 
a  goal  from  a  touchdown  yielding  6  points,  one  from  the  field — 
that  is,  without  the  aid  of  a  touchdown — 4  points ;  a  touchdown 
from  which  no  goal  is  kicked  giving  5  points,  and  a  safety  count- 
ing 2  points  for  the  opponents.  In  practice  it  is  usual  to  have 
the  two  periods  of  play  considerably  shorter  than  thirty-five 
minutes,  generally  not  over  twenty  or  twenty-five. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY, 


29 


HOW  TO  PLAY  FOOT  BALL 

BY    WALTER    CAMP. 

r*i 

(P°^  (P°<S^  (go(5^  go(5?)  (go(??)  (go^  (go^  go^  (go(??) 

I  wish  to  preface  the  brief  remarks  which  I  take  occasion  to 
make  in  this  chapter  regarding  special  plays  in  foot  ball  with 
the  statement  that  they  are  not  intended  to  cover  the  first  prin- 
ciples of  the  individual  positions  in  the  game.  In  another  book 
I  have  dwelt  upon  these  at  length,  and  have  there  defined  with  as 
great  accuracy  as  I  could  the  principal  duties  assignable  to  the 
occupant  of  each  position  on  the  team.  In  addition  to  this,  I 
have  there  given  the  main  features  of  team  play.  It  is  worth 
while  to  mention  this  at  the  outset,  because  a  team  can  make 
no  greater  mistake  than  by  taking  up  what  are  known  as  "trick" 
plays,  or,  in  fact,  any  of  the  ordinary  team  plays  in  the  present 
modern  game,  before  the  individuals  of  that  team  have  become 
thoroughly  perfected  in  the  practical  rudiments  of  the  game, 
and  perform  almost  by  instinct  the  ordinary  duties  of  their 
positions.  A  team  which  undertakes  to  make  strategic  plays  be- 
fore mastering  these  primary  points  will  always  find  itself  work- 
ing at  a  tremendous  disadvantage,  and  the  waste  of  power  will 
be  almost  incalculable.  Perhaps  I  could  not  put  it  more  plainly 
than  to  say  that  the  tendency  is  altogether  too  much  toward 
what  is  known  as  "git  thar"  principles  in  all  of  our  lines  of  sport 
to-day.  A  crew  endeavors  to  row  in  a  shell  before  learning  the 
principles  of  the  stroke ;  our  boxers  are  apt  to  go  in  for  the 
swinging,  knock-out  blow  at  the  sacrifice  of  the  more  old-fash- 
ioned, but  better  form,  sparring;  but  in  none  of  these  forms  is 
It  more  evident  than  in  the  one  under  discussion,  namely,  foot 
ball.  It  is  not  at  all  uncommon  to  see  a  team  playing  intricate 
criss-crosses,  double  and  forward  passes  and  concealed  ball  plays, 
whose  men  are  still  tackling  high,  and  whose  half-backs  kick  a 
punt  from  low  down  on  the  toe.  To  every  reader  of  this  book 
then,  I  say  with  the  heartiest  good  will,  master  the  rudiments 
first  if  you  wish  to  make  yourself  valuable  to  any  team;  master 
them  thoroughly  if  you  wish  to  see  your  team  win  when  it 
comes  to  important  matches.  These  special  plays  which  follow 
are  plays  which  captains  and  coaches  can  work  out  to  an  almo.'^t 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC   LIBRARIT.  3? 

infinite  number  of  variations,  but  it  will  be  the  individual  players 
on  the  team  who  will,  in  the  end,  determine  whether  the  use  of 
these  plays  will  turn  out  successfully. 

Under  the  present  rules,  whenever  a  free  kick  is  attempted,  it 
must  be  an  actual  kick  of  not  less  than  ten  yards  into  the  oppo- 
nent's territory.  For  this  reason  all  the  flying  wedge  opening 
plays  of  some  years  ago,  as  well  as  formed  wedges  from  fair 
catches  and  kick-outs,  have  disappeared.  The  captain  now  has 
to  perform  the  principal  part  of  his  strategic  play,  outside  of  the 
kick,  from  ordinary  downs,  instead  of  from  what  have  been 
called  "free  kicks,"  but  what  have  been  really  "free  wedges." 
Furthermore,  the  more  recent  changes  in  the  rules  make  one  of 
the  prime  essentials  of  a  good  team  proficiency  in  running,  for- 
ward passing  and  quick  kicking  from  regular  formations. 

I,  therefore,  begin  with  running  in  the  line.  By  this  I  mean 
running,  from  his  position  in  the  line,  by  any  one  of  the  seven 
men  forming  the  forward  line  in  the  team.  Some  years  ago  there 
was  a  great  deal  of  guard  running,  and  in  a  good  many  books 
published  recently  on  the  game,  the  guard  is  spoken  of  as  by  all 
odds  the  most  available  man  in  the  line  for  running  with  the 
ball.  That  is  true  to  this  extent.  The  guard  occupies  a  good 
position  for  short  and,  perhaps,  unexpected  runs,  but  with  the 
modern  game  the  guard  is  such  a  feature  in  the  defensive  work 
that  it  has  become  a  good  deal  of  a  question  whether  he  ought  to 
be  given  much  running  to  do  on  his  own  account,  and  especially 
as  he  must  now,  from  his  position  in  the  line.  He  can  no 
longer  be  taken  back  into  what  is  known  as  the  guard-back 
formation.  But  if  the  reader  will  bear  this  in  mind,  and  so  not 
make  use  of  his  guard  except  to  such  an  extent  as  shall  still 
preserve  the  guard  for  his  ordinary  work,  one  can  say  that  he 
has  in  these  guards  two  available  men  in  the  line.  The  most 
natural  run  for  the  guard  or  tackle  is  between  the  tackle  and 
guard  on  the  other  side  of  the  line  from  which  he  stands.  In 
the  performance  of  this  run  by  the  tackle,  the  principal  feature 
is  to  disguise  the  fact  that  the  tackle  is  about  to  start,  and  his 
getting  a  quick  and  free  start,  not  followed,  or  followed  at  a 
considerable  distance  only  by  his  vis-a-vis.  In  order  to  do  this 
he  must  form  the  habit  of  holding  himself  in  the  same  position 
when  he  is  not  going  to  make  this  run  that  he  occupies  when  he 
is  going  to  undertake  it,  for  any  difference  will  indicate  to  his 
opponent  what  the  play  is  to  be.  But,  breaking  away,  he  runs 
closely  behind  the  quarter-back,  taking  the  ball  on  the  fly  as  he 
passes,  and  making  a  short  and  sharp  dash  in  between  his  own 
guard  and  tackle,  or  preferably  just  about  over  the  tackle's 
position,  who,  with  the  assistance  of  the  half  and  full-back,  one 
usually  preceding  and  the  other   following,  break  through  with 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  33 

him,  his  own  quarter-back  and  end  protecting  him  from  behind, 
also  closing  in  upon  him  as  he  goes  through.  A  tackle  can  also 
be  run  in  a  similar  fashion  between  the  tackle  and  end,  guard 
and  center,  or  even  entirely  around  the  end,  but  this  latter  play 
is  of  no  great  value  except  with  particularly  fast  tackles,  and 
more  than  that,  it  uses  up  the  tackle's  wind  a  good  deal  more 
than  when  he  goes  through  the  line,  because  the  interference  is 
likely  to  stand  out  pretty  well  toward  the  edge  of  the  field,  and 
the  tackle  will  run  his  full  distance  and  not  be  able  to  get  through 
the  end  after  all,  thus  having  taken  a  considerable  dash  and 
under  high  speed  and  with  no  good  result,  but  merely  the  loss 
of  a  down.  In  defining  the  tackle's  running,  I  have  also  defined 
the  running  of  the  guard  where  he  goes  around  behind  the 
quarter  in  a  similar  fashion.  These  plays  are  strong  where  the 
guard  is  a  big  man  and  a  hard  runner  with  good  legs.  A  fat 
man  is  useless  in  such  a  case.  The  University  of  Pennsylvania 
performed  some  very  excellent  work  in  dropping  guards  back  as 
interferers,  and  also  in  giving  the  guards  themselves  the  ball 
occasionally.  The  ends  may  be  used  exactly  as  the  guards  or 
tackles  in  running,  or  they  may  be  dropped  back  of  the  line  into 
practically  the  half-back  positions,  and  transferring  positions  and 
alternating  with  the  half-back  taking  the  ball. 

One  of  the  most  effective  plays  ever  worked  was  that  in 
which  the  end-rusher  was  dropped  back  of  the  line  and  sent  in 
between  the  tackle  and  guard  repeatedly,  on  his  own  side,  the 
ball  being  passed  to  him  quite  a  little  distance  from  the  quarter; 
then  suddently  the  same  play  was  made,  and  the  ball  was 
passed  directly  over  the  head  of  this  end-rusher  to  the  half- 
back, who  had  crept  out  beyond,  and  who  thus  took  the  ball  in 
a  free  field  and  made  a  free,  long  run.  This  was  repeated 
again  in  the  same  game,  showing  that  the  play  itself  was  good 
even  to  be  used  more  than  once.  The  above  plays  are  also 
assisted  by  special  formation,  the  players  taking  positions  on 
signals. 

Other  runs  which  are  possible  by  the  line  men  are,  of  course, 
criss-cross  and  double  passes.  One  example  of  these  criss-crosses 
will  illustrate  sufficiently  to  enable  a  captain  or  coach  to  carry 
out  a  great  variety  of  them,  using  every  man  in  his  line  if  he 
wishes. 

For  instance,  the  tackle  and  half-back  criss-cross.  As  in  the 
instance  I  described  of  the  ordinary  tackle  run,  the  tackle — say 
the  left  tackle — suddenly  shakes  himself  free  from  his  opponent 
and  dashes  straight  at  the  quarter,  a  few  feet  behind  him,  of 
course;  the  quarter  passes  him  the  ball  as  he  reaches  him, 
exactly  as  though  the  left  tackle  were  then  going  around  be- 
tween' the    right    tackle    and    the   guard.      But    instead   of   doing 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    til'BRARY.  35 

this,  the  left  tackle  passes  to  the  right  half,  who  runs  to  the 
left  end,  the  half,  full-back  and  quarter  all  interfering  for  him. 
The  great  point  in  this  play  is  to  see  that  the  opposing  right 
tackle  does  not  get  the  runner  as  he  starts  off  to  get  the  ball, 
and  furthermore,  that  this  right  tackle  and  right  end  are  blocked 
late  but  long.  Such  a  criss-cross  can  also  be  worked  with  the 
end,  and  with  the  guard  it  can  also  be  tried  to  turn  either  in- 
side or  outside  of  the  end.  So  much  for  the  line  men  running. 
Wing  shifts  or  line  shifts,  that  is,  plays  wherein  one  side  of  the 
line  shifts  just  before  the  ball  is  put  in  play  over  to  the  other 
side,  are  also  becoming  increasingly  common. 

Next  we  come  to  the  half-backs  and  full-backs.  Every  one  is 
familiar  with  the  following  plays,  which  we  only  mention  in  order 
to  call  them,  to  the  attention  of  the  captain  who  is  studying  out  in 
the  early  part  of  the  season  what  plays  he  shall  make  the  most  of. 
The  half-back  running  on  his  own  side  between  any  of  the  various 
men  in  the  line;  the  half-back  running  between  any  of  the  men  on 
the  side  away  from  his  own  side ;  the  full-back  running  on  the 
right  side  or  the  left  side  through  the  same  openings  and  under 
the  same  circumstances  and  with  practically  the  same  interfer- 
ence, for  in  the  modern  game  the  captain  is  wise  who  uses  his 
three  men  behind  the  line  in  such  a  way  that  any  one  of  them 
may  perform  any  of  the  various  plays  devised  for  the  backs,  and 
then  maintain  a  similar  formation,  no  matter  what  the  play  is  to 
be.  One  cannot  too  strongly  deprecate  the  exact  detailing  of  certain 
movements  in  certain  plays  to  get  through  or  block  or  to  take  care 
of  particular  individuals  when  that  move  leads  to  the  betrayal  of 
the  play  before  it  has  actually  come  off.  The  cardinal  points  to 
be  remembered  regarding  running  by  the  half-backs  and  full- 
backs are  these :  That  the  interference  must  depend  upon  the 
speed  of  the  men  engaged,  and  that  no  interference  should  be  such 
as  to  slow  up  the  runner  appreciably,  unless  it  be  for  some  trick 
play  or  double  pass  where  the  slowing  up  of  the  runner  means 
merely  his  being  caught  after  getting  rid  of  the  ball.  I  have  seen 
many  a  good  team  spoiled  by  their  attempting  to  follow  out  a  set 
rule  as  to  the  order  in  which  interferers  should  reach  the  end. 
For  instance,  in  the  days  of  Heffelfinger,  he  showed  how  a  guard 
could  readily  go  from  his  own  position  out  to  the  opposite  end, 
and  before  the  runner,  and  interfere  most  nobly  for  him  all  the 
way  down  the  field.  For  this  reason  every  guard  was  at  once 
coached  to  go  out  and  interfere  on  the  end.  Three  out  of  five 
were  too  big  and  slow  to  accomplish  this  to  any  advantage,  but 
that  did  not  seem  to  make  any  difference.  Somebody  had  written 
that  the  guard  should  interfere  on  the  end,  and  the  result  was  that 
everybody  had  to  wait  until  the  guard  got  out  there.  Meantime, 
the  runner  was  usually  caught  from  behind.    A  good  guard  who 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY  37 

can  pick  up  his  feet  lively,  and  who  can  get  around  quickly  and 
easily  after  blocking,  can  get  out  before  an  ordinarily  fast  runner. 
So,  too,  can  the  opposite  end.  This  season  it  is  not  unlikely  that 
the  man  who  is  allowed  to  play  back  of  the  line,  provided  he  is 
outside  the  position  of  the  man  on  the  end  of  the  line,  will  be 
used  as  an  interferer.  Som'",  teams  use  the  tackle  here,  but  this 
is  a  mistake,  because  the  tackle  should  slow  up  the  opposing 
tackle  and  should  also  make  the  play  safe  from  behind.  A  team 
ought  not  to  have  a  quarter-back  who  is  too  slow  to  get  out  to 
the  end  as  an  interferer  before  the  back  with  the  ball  reaches  the 
other  point.  But  for  all  that  there  are  quarter-backs,  and  good 
ones,  too,  who  are  a  little  slow  in  this  and  hold  back  the  runner. 
These  men  should  either  be  coached  into  better  speed  or  taught 
a  little  different  way  of  getting  rid  of  the  ball  on  the  run,  per- 
haps, or  be  sent  to  perform  the  tackle's  duties,  and  let  the  tackle 
get  there  if  the  tackle  is  a  remarkably  fast  man  ;  otherwise  such 
a  transfer  would  only  make  bad  worse.  From  what  I  have  al- 
ready said  the  captain  can  see  that  he  must  measure  his  inter- 
ference by  the  speed  of  his  interferers,  and  match  them  with  the 
speed  of  his  runner  with  the  ball  in  order  to  satisfactorily  solve 
the  equation  for  his  own  team.  It  is  the  captain  of  brains  who 
wins  by  doing  just  these  things,  while  the  captain  without  them 
takes  the  hard  and  fast  rule  that  has  been  laid  down  by  some 
one,  perhaps  of  his  own  team,  who  has  written  an  article  from 
the  knowledge  of  only  one  or  two  teams,  and  thinks  that  all  can 
be  brought  up  to  exactly  the  same  point  in  the  same  way. 

Regarding  going  through  the  line  close  to  the  center  by  backs 
(and  by  backs  I  mean  the  half-backs  as  well),  there  are  two 
ways  of  helping  a  man  through  the  line.  One  is  to  batter  a  hole 
before  him  and  let  him  slip  through,  and  the  other  is  to  put  him 
up  against  the  line  and  then  push  him  so  hard  that  the  line  has 
to  yield  and  let  him  through.  There  are  line  plays  which  com- 
bine a  variety  of  these  tactics,  but  there  are  some  principles  to  be 
remembered  in  connection  with  them  which  will  give  them  some- 
thing more  than  a  careless  "hit  or  miss"  move.  In  the  first  place, 
a  big,  heavy  man  should  never  be  run  into  the  line  with  one  or 
two  light  interferers  preceding  him,  whereas  a  light  man  can  be 
run  in  behind  two  heavy  men  with  abandon.  The  reason  for  this 
is  that  there  are  times  when  the  hole  will  be  choked  up  in  spite 
of  the  attempt  of  the  interferers,  and  a  heavy  man  getting  his 
head  down  may  strike  one  of  the  interferers  in  the  back  and  in- 
capacitate him  for  future  work.  It  is  not  so  apt  to  hurt  the  run- 
ner as  it  is  the  man  whom  he  strikes,  although  there  have  been 
cases  of  injury  to  the  runner.  When  the  hole  is  choked  up,  and 
heavy  men  are  interfering,  they  can  usually  keep  the  mass  mov- 
ing away  from  the  runner,  even  if  they  do  not  open  the  hole  for 


1— Instruction    in     Itreakin.i;-     tliroimh;     Slaiuiard.     second     man     from     tin-     left 
C^ooney    leaning    over    in    front;     Captain     Dillon,     hands    on    knees;     half-baok 
iibbott    back   of    Captain.      2— '-Bin"    Edwards,    Princeton,    prominent    umpire. 
PRINCETON  PRACTICE  SCENES. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  39 

him,  and  this  play  is  much  less  hard  and  far  less  dangerous.  In 
sending  two  light  interferers  ahead  to  spring  an  opening  for  the 
runner,  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  an  opening  made  in  this 
way  is  a  quick,  sharp  one,  and  should  not  be  called  upon  to  rely 
for  its  efficacy  upon  steady  pushing.  An  opening,  on  the  other 
hand,  made  by  two  heavy  men  in  this  fashion  can  be  much  smaller 
and  rely  largely  upon  the  accumulated  force  even  after  the  run- 
ner strikes  the  line.  The  men  who  go  ahead  to  interfere  must 
always  remember  if  they  have  to  go  down  to  fall  away  from  the 
opening  and  not  block  it  up.  The  men  who  run  behind  the  run- 
ner should  always  remember  that  it  is  their  duty  not  only  to  pro- 
tect him  from  behind  and  push  and  crowd  him  when  he  begins  to 
slow  up,  but  never,  under  any  circumstances,  to  interfere  with  his 
legs.  Careless  men  going  behind  a  runner  will  oftentimes  step  on 
his  heels  and  throw  him  when  the  runner  left  to  himself  could 
have  made  his  distance.  The  ends  are  particularly  serviceable  in 
this  pushing  work,  and  there  are  very  few  ends  at  the  present 
day  who  do  not  understand  their  half-backs  and  backs  so  well 
that  they  can  go  up  \\rith  them  into  line  and  give  them  courage 
and  assistance  by  pushing  after  they  have  struck  the  line. 

To  come  now  to  the  wedges  or  mass  plays.  Owing  to  the 
prejudice  of  the  public  and  the  feeling  that  wedge  work  was 
taking  too  much  of  the  attention  of  the  players,  captains  and 
coaches,  the  rule-makers  attempted  to  eliminate  a  great  deal  of 
this  work  by  the  passage  of  a  rule  against  momentum-mass  plays 
as  well  as  the  passage  of  a  rule  insisting  upon  actual  kicks.  This 
latter  rule  I  have  mentioned  earlier  in  this  book.  There  is  no 
question  but  that  this  has  done  away  with  a  great  deal  of  the 
most  showy  part  of  the  flying  wedge,  but  rules  against  momen- 
tum-mass playing  had  not  and  are  not  likely  to  eliminate  the 
use  of  the  principle  of  wedges.  They  took  off  the  weight  which 
it  was  possible  to  get  into  these  wedges,  and  in  that  way  were 
an  excellent  thing,  but  it  required  more  severe  legislation  to 
eliminate  all  mass  plays.  This,  however,  was  accomplished  quite 
effectively  by  the  ten-yard  rule  adopted  in  1906. 

The  development  of  the  position  of  quarter-back,  so  far  as  run- 
ning is  concerned,  has  been  toward  the  old  rules,  when  many 
years  ago  it  was  possible  for  the  man  receiving  the  ball  from  the 
snap-back  to  carry  it  forward.  Some  two  years  since  a  rule  was 
enacted  again  permitting  the  quarter-back  to  run,  providing, 
however,  he  went  out  at  least  five  yards  from  the  point  at  which 
the  ball  was  snapped.  The  first  season  this  permission  did  not 
offer  any  very  great  developments  along  the  line,  but  last  year 
it  was  tried  with  far  more  effect,  and  like  any  other  play  of  this 
nature,  seems  to  be  developing  in  the  hands  of  the  coaches  and 
players  until  it  promises  to  be  a  considerable  feature  of  the  game. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  41 

It  is  interesting,  because  it  admits  of  one  more  possibility,  and  a 
run  of  this  nature  when  it  is  thoroughly  successful  develops  into 
spectacular  play  which  pleases  the  spectator  and  demands  one 
more  qualification  in  a  quarter-back. 

There  are  several  methods  of  effecting  this  play,  and  although 
naturally  it  is  difficult  to  bring  it  off  unless  it  is  performed  un- 
expectedly, It  does  lend  itself  to  the  development  of  interference. 
The  usual  method  is  for  the  interference  to  circle  outside  of 
tackle,  the  quarter-back  protected  by  the  interferers  making  a 
very  direct  run  out  toward  the  end  and  circling  as  his  interferers 
turn  in. 

Another  method  is  for  the  ball  to  be  passed  back  apparently 
to  the  full-back  for  a  kick,  and  he  acting,  as  will  be  seen,  as  a 
quarter-back,  may  run  with  the  ball  out  around  the  end  or  any- 
where, so  long  as  he  passes  the  line  of  scrimmage  at  least  five 
yards  out  from  the  point  where  the  ball  was  snapped.  Forward 
passing  by  any  man  back  of  the  line  is  allowable  this  year,  pro- 
vided the  ball  crosses  the  line  of  scrimmage  at  least  five  yards 
out  from  the  point  where  it  was  put  in  play.  This  was  most 
brilliantly  developed  by  one  or  two  teams  last  season  and  pro- 
duced some  very  interesting  features. 

To  come  to  the  last  point  of  this  brief  summary  of  plays, 
namely,  kicking.  This  department  under  the  present  rules  be- 
comes still  more  important.  The  special  points  about  kicking 
will  be  the  accurate  placing  of  the  ball  and  the  acquirement  of 
short  and  long-distance  punting  as  well  as  place  kicking.  Kick- 
ing into  touch,  where  admissible  under  the  rules,  should  be  made 
much  more  of,  and  it  is  becoming  absolutely  necessary  for  a  team 
to  have  good  punters  and  quick,  sharp  kickers  in  order  to  take 
advantage  of  certain  modifications  in  the  laws  of  the  game.  To 
go  into  the  details  of  these  kicks  would  be  an  almost  infinite  task, 
but  the  captain  can  study  out  the  situation  from  the  following 
premises :  A  kick  is  absolutely  necessary  at  kick-off,  kick-out 
and  every  fair  catch.  What  kind  of  a  kick  then  will  be  most 
advantageous  to  his  team?  A  short  one,  high,  where  his  man 
can  get  under  it,  or  a  long-distance  one,  giving  the  opponents  a 
chance,  perhaps,  of  return,  but  enabling  him,  if  he  has  fast  ends, 
to  hold  the  ball  down  at  the  distance  of  the  kick? 

Kicking  has  thus  come  to  be  an  absolute  essential  in  a  well- 
rounded  team,  and  the  style  of  that  kicking  adapted  to  the 
make-up  of  the  individual  components  of  that  team  in  end 
rushes,  tackles  and  backs. 

The  new  rule  providing  that  when  a  kicked  ball  strikes  the 
ground  it  puts  everybody  on  side,  has  led  to  many  short  punts 
over  the  rush  line,  and  a  general  development  of  kicks  similar  to 
those  formerly  known  as  quarter-back  kicks. 


E.  B.  COCHEMS, 
Coach  St.  Louis  University. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARlT. 


43 


THE  FORWARD  PASS  AND 
ON-SIDE    KICK 

BY    EDWARD    B.    COCHEMS, 

Left  half-back,  University  of  Wisconsin,  1901. 
Director  of  Athletics,  St.  Louis  University. 

IISSIISIISSSIl 

o 

The  necessary  brevity  of  this  article  will  not  permit  of  a 
detailed  discussion  of  the  forward  pass  and  on-side  kick.  Owing 
to  the  fact  that  coaches  and  others  over  the  country  interested 
in  the  revised  rules  have  had  but  one  short  season  to  test  and 
develop  these  new  features  of  Rugby,  and  this  season  in  the 
Middle  West  being  even  abridged  by  reform  legislation,  only 
hints  and  general  suggestions  will  be  in  order.  In  one  or  two 
instances  I  will  deviate  from  this  plan. 

Under  the  old  rules,  the  first  principles  of  offence  had  been 
to  maintain  possession  of  the  ball  to  the  last  extremity.  This 
was  due  to  the  fact  that  the  longer  the  team  possessed  the  ball, 
the  shorter  the  period  of  time  the  opposing  team  had  in  which 
to  score.  Also,  that  practically  the  only  chance  to  score  was 
during  the  period  of  possession.  With  only  five  yards  to  go  this 
principle  generally  governed  the  coaches'  plans  for  the  season. 
The  idea  had  become  so  firmly  rooted  in  foot  ball  tactics  as  a 
fundamental  principle  that  scarcely  any  of  last  year's  foot  ball 
mentors  divorced  themselves  from  its  influence. 

The  rule  giving  the  ball  to  the  opponents  on  the  spot'  from 
which  the  ball  was  passed,  if  it  touched  the  ground  before 
coming  in  contact  with  any  player,  seemed  drastic  and  fatal  to  a 
reasonable  belief  in  its  practicability.  Most  coaches  accordingly 
confined  their  efforts  to  short  passes  of  the  basket  ball  variety 
and  usually  essayed  to  protect  the  receiver  by  interference.  The 
Rules  Committee  apparently  have  since  agreed  with  the  view  of 
the  majority  and  have  changed  the  rules  to  read,  "not  loss  of 
the  ball,"  but  a  "fifteen  yard  penalty,"  on  the  first  and  second 
down  for  a  failure  to  make  a  successful  pass.  The  lack  of  faith 
in  the  value  of  the  play  had  another  result,  and  that  is,  it  drove 
most  coaches  to  the  development  of  the  on-side  kick.  Indeed, 
before  the  new  rules  were  adopted,  Rugby,  excepting  rowing 
perhaps,  was  freer  of  the  element  of  chance  than  any  of  the 
other   collegiate  or  professional   sports.     Under   the  new   rules, 


44 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


chance  became  an  important  factor,  and  this  must  be  continually 
kept  in  mind  hereafter  in  any  conception  of  the  use  of  the  pass 
and  the  on-side  kick. 

In  order  to  fully  understand  the  value  of  these  plays  one  must 
consider  carefully  the  physical  proportions  of  the  ball  and  the 
manual  performance  essential  in  its  most  perfect  execution.  This, 
however,  is  seldom  given  attention.  A  base  ball  pitcher  would 
be  but  a  poor  artist  if  he  did  not  take  cognizance  of  the  size, 
weight  and  shape  of  the  ball  and  its  seams.     This  is  even  more 


Fig.  1. 
End-over-end  pass— underhand  or  round-arm. 

important  for  the  player  who  contemplates  the  use  of  a  forward 
pass  or  on-side  kick. 

There  are  various  ways  in  which  the  ball  can  be  passed  and 
kicked.  Each  method  depends  on  its  value  for  the  play  in  which 
it  figures ;  the  player  who  makes  it ;  the  portion  of  the  field  in 
which  it  takes  place ;  the  opponents'  defence ;  the  weather  condi- 
tions, etc.  The  basket  ball  pass  was  used  considerably  in  the 
Eas't.  The  player  holds  the  ball  above  his  head  with  both  hands 
in  the  act  of  delivery,  the  same  as  though  he  were  throwing  a 
basket  ball.     This   method   does   not   depend   upon   the   shape   of 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  45 

the   ball,   is   accurate,   and    fairly   safe,   but   good   only    for   short 
distances. 

Fig.  I  represents  the  end-over-end  pass.  The  fingers  lap 
considerably  over  the  end  of  the  ball  in  order  to  secure  a  firm 
grasp.  The  longitudinal  or  longest  axis  is  parallel  with  the  ulna 
and  radius  of  the  forearm.  The  ball  rests  against  the  arm 
during  the  act  of  delivery  only  and  when  delivered  flies  end 
over  end  in  the  same  position.  It  can  be  thrown  with  a  side  or 
underhand  throw.     This  style  is  good  for  a  short  or  long  pass. 


Fig.  2. 
Underhand  spiral— fingers  on  lacing. 

passes  of  35  yards  or  more,  flight  distance  being  possible.  It  is 
good  in  rainy  weather,  since  the  ball  is  not  so  apt  to  slip  with 
the  fingers  over  the  end.  For  all-around  uses  it  is  the  safest. 
Moreover,  any  player  can  learn  to  make  it  for  reasonable  dis- 
tances. 

Besides  these  two  methods,  we  have  what  I  might  term  a 
broad  side  pass.  The  finger  tips  just  overlap  the  lacing,  which 
afford  a  firm  hold.  The  ball  can  be  thrown  many  yards,  either 
with  a  side  or  overhead  delivery,  as  contingencies  necessitate. 

Fig.  2  brings  us  to  the  forward  pass  spiral.    The  ball  is  grasped 


4g  SPALDING'S   ATHLETIC   LIBRARY. 

with  the  fingers  /ust  over  the  lacing,  with  lacings  facing  the 
ground  and  one  end  resting  on  the  wrist.  It  is  an  underhand 
throw,  similar  to  the  form  used  in  heaving  the  discus,  with  this 
difference,  that  it  is  not  a  full  turn.  It  is  good  for  short  passes 
and  high  ones,  but  is  weak,  owing  to  the  opponents'  ability  to 
block  it  and  skill  necessary  in  its  execution.  It  is  good  for  a 
high  throw  especially,  because  the  fingers,  lying  between  the 
lacings,  afford  the  necessary  friction  for  an  upward  pass. 

Figs.   3,  4,  5   and  6  represent  the  overhand   spiral.     It  is  the 
acme  of  forward  passing  methods.     The  accomplishment  of  this 


Fig.  3. 
Correct  position  of  hand  on  ball  for  overhand  pass,  with  thumb  on  lace. 

style  demands  many  weary  hours  of  drill  and  a  hand  large 
•enough  to  encircle  the  ball  at  a  point,  as  seen  in  the  pictures 
near  the  seventh  lacing.  For  distances  this  style  has  no  equal. 
Nevertheless  in  rainy  weather  it  is  useless.  To  make  this  throw 
the  ball  is  firmly  grasped  at  the  circumference  near  the  far 
lacing  with  either  the  thumb  (Figs.  3  and  4)  slightly  over  and 
between  the  sixth  and  seventh  lacings,  or  the  fingers  (Figs.  5 
and  6)  (which  is  just  a  reverse  position  of  the  hand),  and  the  = 
fingers  or  thumb  grasping  the  ball  slightly  above  the  seventh 
lacing  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  ball.     The  thumb  or  fingers, 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY, 


47 


as  the  case  may  be,  coming  in  contact  with  the  lacing,  causes  the 
friction  which  results  in  the  spiral  motion  of  the  ball,  which  flies 
with  its  long  axis  horizontally.  With  this  style  the  ball  can  be 
hurled  like  a  projectile  from  50  to  60  yards.  Of  the  various 
methods  demonstrated,  this  is  the  only  one  which  cannot  be 
performed  by  every  player.  All  the  others  can  be  accomplished 
by  faithful  endeavor.  From  practical  experience  and  mathe- 
rnatical  investigation  I  tind  that  scarcely  four  out  of  twenty 
players  can  ever  hope  to  successfully  accomplish  this  pass.  In 
some  squads  no  one  will  be  found  capable.     A  player  must  have 


Fig.  4. 
(Jverhand  spiral— thumb  on  the  lace. 

a  girth  measurement  of  nearly  nine  inches  from  thumb  to  second 
linger,  measured  from  the  tip  of  the  thumb  to  the  tip  of  the 
secpnd  finger,  tape  following  the  contour  of  the  hand.  Most 
players  have  a  measurement  of  from  7^/^  to  8^  inches.  More- 
over, the  fingers  and  thumb  must  be  powerful.  If  one  would 
measure  a  bowling  ball  from  thumb  to  finger  hole,  or  encircle  an 
ordinary  base  ball,  he  v/ould  get  a  complete  idea.  A  strong 
bowler  with  necessary  girth  or  a  base  ball  pitcher  should  make  a 
good  forward  passer. 

The  advantages  of  this  method,  which  like  the  pass  itself  is 


48  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBBABY. 

practically  a  fair  weather  play,  come  from  the  distance  that  it 
can  be  hurled,  its  speed  and  accuracy  and  the  overhead  throw, 
which  prevents  blocking  or  interference.  The  old  style  of 
receiving  a  passed  or  kicked  ball  was  to  form  a  basket  of  the 
hands  and  abdominal  region  of  the  body  and  to  draw  in  the 
abdomen  at  the  moment  of  contact,  breaking  the  rebound.  Under 
the  new  rules  this  style  had  better  be  dispensed  with  as  much  as 
possible  and  the  ball  received  as  one  would  catch  a  base  ball. 
(Fig.  7.) 


Fig.  5. 
Correct  position  of  hand  on  ball  for  overhand  spiral— fingers  on  the  lace. 

The  on-side  kick  was  used  oftener  last  year  than  the  forward 
pass,  owing  to  the  fact  that  it  was  supposed  to  be  more  accurate 
and  practical.  Instead  of  nullifying  the  play  the  moment  the 
ball  touched  the  ground,  as  with  the  pass,  this  fact  put  every 
player  on-side.  The  kick  can  be  made  end-over-end,  if  the 
object  is  to  have  it  roll  forward,  or  kicked  with  a  spiral  motion, 
if  the  aim  is  to  place  it.  Some  kick  the  ball  so  that  its  middle 
portion  fits  the  instep  and  the  long  axis  is  perpendicular  to  the 
foot.  This  is  an  excellent  method  to  apply  for  short  distances, 
and  for  placing  it  is  the  most  accurate  of  them  all. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC   LIBRART.  49 

The  on-side  kick  is  most  effective  in  the  opponents'  section  of 
the  field  or  just  beyond  the  center  field.  Of  course  it  can  be 
used  unexpectedly  in  a  team's  own  territory,  but  in  the  oppo- 
nents' field  it  gives  the  required  distance  and  the  opportunity  of 
recovery  without  loss  of  distance  which  a  regular  punt  would 
secure.  Instead  of  keeping  the  ball  in  the  air  it  should  be 
kicked  to  the  ground  as  soon  as  the  case  will  permit,  since  the 
moment  it  touches,  the  whole  team  is  on-side.  The  longer  the 
kicker  can  delay  kicking  the  further  down  the  field  the  team  can 


Overhand  spiral— fingers  on  lacing. 


get  to  either  recover  the  ball  themselves  or  form  interference  for 
the  player  who  is  supposed  to  recover.  Should  a  team  have  a 
very  fast  player  or  players  and  an  accurate  punter  the  ball  can 
be  kicked  in  the  air  to  one  side,  and  the  fast  players,  by  being 
stationed  back  of  the  ball  when  kicked,  can  recover  before  it 
touches  the  ground.  This  play  can  be  worked  quite  often  owing 
to  the  fact  that  the  opponents  will  be  lead  to  believe  that  the 
ball  cannot  be  recovered  until  it  touches  the  ground.  Another 
good  play,  and  usually  effective  for  a  score  when  properly 
executed,  is  the  quick,  shprt  punt  over  the  head  of  the  safety 


60 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


man  or  to  one  side  of  him.  Sometimes,  when  within  the 
opponents'  25  or  35-yard  Hne,  a  high  pmit  that  goes  only  ten  or 
fifteen  yards  is  worth  while.  Often  the  opponents  will  miss  the 
ball,  due  to  the  numbers  attempting  to  catch  it,  and  this  conse- 
quently leaves  a  free-for-all  play  in  which  any  one  is  apt  to 
recover  it.  A  free  catch  is  the  only  way  to  prevent  this  play. 
In  order  to  be  successful  at  the  on-side  kick  it  is  necessary  for 
the  kicker  to  spend  many  hours  practicing  the  various  kicks  in 
detail  and  the  players  in  learning  to  pick  up  the  ball  on  the  run 
while  it  is  rolling  on  the  ground. 


Fig.  7. 
Receiving  a  pass. 

The  new  rules  have  made  Rugby  the  most  symmetrical  sport 
of  all.  It  now  embraces  the  best  traits  of  base  ball,  track,  tennis, 
basket  ball,  etc.  For  practice  a  good  game  is  to  erect  basket 
ball  posts  at  either  end  of  the  field  and  use  the  foot  ball  as  you 
would  a  basket  ball  under  basket  ball  rules.  In  this  way 
proficiency  in  the  use  of  the  forward  pass  can  be  easily  brought 
about.  Another  good  scheme  is  to  place  targets  on  a  convenient 
fence  and  practice  hitting  it.  A  prize  for  the  most  accurate 
shooter  is  always  an  incentive  to  work. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


51 


Should  I  begin  to  explain  the  different  plays  in  which  the  pass 
and  kick  could  figure,  I  would  invite  myself  to  an  endless  task. 
However,  in  closing  this  article,  I  would  suggest  that  each  coach 
and  player  diagram  all  the  plays  that  he  knows  and  try  and  fit 
it  up  so  that  a  forward  pass  or  an  on-side  kick  will  figure  in  it. 
Otherwise  he  will  be  planning  plays  especially  adapted  for  the 
pass  or  kick  and  because  of  its  singularity  of  special  formation 
will  make  it  easy  of  detection.  Moreover,  a  pass  fitted  on  a  regular 
play  will  make  both  trick  and  straight  play  out  of  it  and  conse- 
quently add  strength  to  both. 


Fig 
Overhand  pass  after  delivering. 


1 —Captain  Morse  (in  the  Icnid)  and  Roome,  two  of  the  baclis,  making  a  false 
run,  while  man  with  the  ball  goes  in  another  direction.  2 — Captain  Morse 
making  a  dash  around  the  end.  3 — Yale  backs  ready  to  carry  the  ball 
(Captain  Sam   Morse   on  the   right). 

YALE  PRACTICE  SCENES. 


SPALDING'S    ATHI^ETIC    LIBRARY. 


HOW  TO   PLAY 
QUARTER-BACK 

BY   WALTER    H.    ECKERSALL, 

University  of  Chicago. 

OSOHSSSHH 

t,a 

The  position  of  quarter-back  is  considered  by  many  to  be  the 
most  important  one  on  a  foot  ball  team,  but  to  my  mind  each 
of  the  eleven  positions  is  a  critical  one.  At  some  time  during 
every  game  an  opportunity  comes  to  each  man  to  play  his  position 
as  it  should  be  played,  and  on  his  ability  to  grasp  that  opportunity 
depends  the  result  of  many  a  contest. 

A  foot  ball  team  is  composed  of  eleven  men,  and  if,  as  some- 
times happens,  one  man  is  apparently  doing  all  the  scoring,  you 
may  be  sure  the  other  ten  men  are  doing  their  duty  in  order  to 
make  such  a  feat  possible,  and  praise  should  be  given  to  them 
equally  with  the  fortunate  individual  performer. 

The  quarter-back  position  may  wisely  be  termed  the  keystone 
one  of  a  team.  Especially  is  this  so,  as  is  usually  the  case,  when 
the  quarter-back  gives  the  signals.  He  is  then  truly  the  field 
captain  and  largely  responsible  for  the  outcome  of  the  contest 
through  which  he  directs  his  men. 

-  A  team  should  have  the  utmost  confidence  in  its  quarter-back 
in  order  to  play  with  the  speed  and  precision  by  which  games 
are  won.  On  the  other  hand,  the  quarter-back,  by  steady,  consis- 
tent play  and  ability  to  deal  with  emergencies,  should  merit  this 
confidence.  Often  the  very  tones  in  which  the  signals  are  given 
can  bring  order  out  of  chaos,  and  vice  versa. 

There  are  just  as  many  different  ways  of  playing  quarter-back 
as  there  are  coaches  and  quarter-backs.  Of  course,  a  certain 
set  of  playing  rules  must  be  followed,  but  aside  from  that,  the 
field  left  for  devising  original  plays  is  large  and  on  the  coach 
largely  depends  the  origin  of  these  plays.  If  the  formations  are 
such  "that  a  great  deal  of  time  is  required  to  carry  them  out 
successfully  the  playing  of  the  quarter-back  will  naturally  be 
slower,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  if  trick  playing,  running  and 
kicking  are  resorted  to,  the  speed  of  the  quarter-back  is  propor- 
tionately increased. 

The  material  with  which  a  coach  has  to  work  often  determines 


iii>i  ruction    in    line    work.       3 — Instruction    i:i 
lueakiug  through. 
SCENES  IN  HARVARD  PRACTICE, 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  55 

the  style  of  play  to  be  adopted.  If  the  men  are  heavy,  and  con- 
■^equently  slow,  the  plan  of  action  will  have  to  be  along  the  line 
of  their  plunging,  line-plugging  abilities.  And,  on  the  other  hand, 
if  the  material  is  light,  a  speedy,  crafty  campaign  must  be  planned 
to  offset  the  lack  of  weight. 

Other  points  which  the  coach  considers  carefully  in  devising 
the  plays  for  his  quarter-back  are  the  abilities  and  handicaps  of 
the  opposing  team.  Perhaps  one  team  is  noted  for  a  certain 
style  of  play,  hence  plays  are  planned  to  cope  successfully,  if 
possible,  with  this  method.  These  plans  failing,  often  an  entirely 
different  mode  of  procedure  is  expounded  to  the  players  between 
the  halves  by  the  coach,  and  the  quarter-back  receives  his  instruc- 
tions accordingly. 

As  each  succeeding  team  naturally  puts  up  a  different  game  the 
coach  is  obliged  to  think  up  new  plays  constantly  and  teach  them 
to  his  men. 

So  it  seems  to  me  the  coach  does  a  great  deal  of  hard  work 
that  the  quarter-back  is  generally  given  credit  for.  Still,  the 
quarter-back  must  use  his  good  judgment  in  the  direction  of 
these  plays  in  the  heat  of  battle,  or  the  best-laid  plans  of  the 
coach  are  for  naught ;  so,  perhaps,  after  all  the  responsibility  is 
equally  divided. 

REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  QUARTER-BACK. 

As  a  general  rule,  with  but  few  exceptions,  the  quarter-back 
is  a  small  fellow,  weighing  in  the  neighborhood  of  one  hundred 
and  fifty  pounds,  small  of  stature,  but  very  compactly  built,  a 
good  runner,  plenty  of  nerve,  good  judgment  and  cool-headed. 

Theoretically,  he  is  the  captain  of  the  team,  for  he  directs  its 
play  from  the  start  of  the  game  to  the  end.  If  he  is  an  intelligent 
and  experienced  player,  his  judgment  will  rarely  be  questioned 
by  the  captain,  and  if  this  be  the  case  the  captain  should  be 
reprimanded  for  such  interference.  The  quarter-back  is  depended 
upon  for  the  team's  victories  and  blamed,  generally,  for  its 
defeats. 

This  man  should  have  a  combination  of  qualities,  which,  for- 
tunately, most  quarter-backs  have. 

First — He  must  have  a  good  memory.  He  should  be  able  to 
remember  from  sixty  to  seventy  different  plays  and  the  signals 
for  them,  and  he  must  know  them  in  such  a  way  that  there 
is  no  hesitancy  or  delay  on  his  part  in  giving  them. 

Second— He  must  be  able  to  devise  some  plan  for  finding  out 
the  weaknesses  in  the  opposing  team,  and  then  hammer  them 
consistently.      This    is    accomplished    most    readily    by    using   the 


1— rractice  Id  runniug  around  end;  foot  ball  represents  end  man  on  opposing 
team.  2— Coach  Rockwell  training  the  men  how  to  side-step  with  the  ball 
or  dodge  while  i-unning.  3 — Captain  Sam  Morse  recovering  a  fumble  and 
starting  for  a  man  ahead.  4 — Coach  Rockwell  and  Trainer  John  Mack 
showing  a  player  how  to  make  a  forward  pass  over  an  opposing  player. 
YALE   PRACTICE  SCENES, 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  57 

full-back  and  sending  him  at  every  point  in  the  line,  thus  finding 
some  spot  which  is  weaker  than  any  of  the  others. 

Third — He  must  not  use  any  man  too  much,  for  fear  of  tiring 
him  too  quickly,  thus  weakening  the  offense  and  the  team  as  a 
result. 

Fourth^— He  should  consult  with  his  own  line  men  in  regard  to 
the  position  of  their  opponents,  thus  ascertaining,  in  a  measure, 
the  chances  of  sending  a  play  through  one  of  them  with  a  marked 
degree  of  success. 

Fifth — ^He  should  always  encourage  his  team  mates,  whether 
they  are  being  outplayed  or  otherwise,  for  it  is  too  well  known 
in  foot  ball  that  the  players  never  lie  down  and  a  little  encourage- 
ment goes  a  great  way. 

Sixth — He  must  always  bear  in  mind  the  coach's  instructions, 
and  also  consider  them  seriously. 

Seventh — Always  consider  your  opponents  as  gentlemen. 

Eighth — Always  treat  the  officials  in  a  courteous  manner,  being 
ever  mindful  of  the  fact  that  they  are  selected  as  impartial 
overseers  of  the  game,  and,  too,  that  any  act  of  discourtesy  on 
the  part  of  any  player  gives  the  officials  the  power  to  send  the 
offender  from  the  game. 

Ninth — Be  a  cheerful  loser  and  give  the  credit  where  it 
belongs. 

Tenth — Take  your  victories  modestly  and  your  defeats  with 
courage. 

POSITION   OF  THE   QUARTER-BACK. 

The  quarter-back  should  stand  squarely  behind  the  center  in  a 
crouched  position.  It  is  necessary  that  he  hold  his  hands  in  a 
fixed  position  to  receive  the  ball.  He  should  make  no  move 
whatever,  with  his  hands,  or  by  a  dip,  from  bending  of  the  knees, 
to  receive  the  ball,  for  if  he  does  he  immediately  gives  a  warning 
to  the  opposing  team,  thus  enabling  them  in  many  cases  to  get 
the  charge  on  his  own  team  mates.  In  connection  with  this,  it 
may  be  necessary  to  add,  that  it  is  very  helpful  to  have  a  starting 
signal.  This  enables  the  team  to  start  at  the  same  time  and 
does  not  give  the  opponents  any  undue  advantage,  which  might 
come  if  the  quarter  were  to  give  a  motion  with  his  hands  or 
some  other  outward  sign. 

In  receiving  the  ball  from  the  center,  the  quarter  should  use 
his  hands  as  much  as  possible.  I  have  found  it  very  useful  by 
having  my  hands  close  to  my  body  in  such  a  manner  that  the 
ball  comes  in  contact  with  my  body  and  hands  at  practically  the 
same  time,  causing  no  delay  whatever,  in  passing  the  ball  to  the 
player  who  was  called  upon  to  carry  it  on  that  particular  play. 


0^^^ 


3 Illustrating    the    forward    pass,    the    ball    hping    held    bv    both    hands   and 

tin-own    in    the    manner    used    in    basket    ball.      2— Captain    Foster   of    the    Har- 
vard.   I'.Mlfi     tenm 


PRACTICE   SCENES. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  59 

Many  coaches  advocate  a  side  position,  which  necessitates,  as 
they  claim,  a  surer  pass  from  the  center,  but  it  does  not  allow 
the  quarter  to  start  quickly,  thus  delaying  him  in  getting  the 
ball  to  the  runner  immediately,  which  is  a  very  essential  point. 

The  quarter  must  familiarize  himself  as  much  as  possible  with 
the  ball.  He  should  spend  plenty  of  time  working  with  his 
center,  making  whatever  adjustments  and  suggestions  he  deems 
necessary  for  the  further  perfection  of  his  play.  He  must  spend 
some  time  practicing  with  a  wet,  heavy  ball,  for  no  one  can  tell 
when  the  conditions  will  be  such  that  the  ball  will  become  wet, 
heavy  and  soggy. 

PASSING. 

In  my  estimation,  passing  is  the  most  important  work  of  the 
quarter-back.  As  has  already  been  stated,  nearly  every  team  has 
its  quarter  coached  differently  in  the  various  branches  of  attack. 

When  the  full-back  is  called  upon  to  make  a  straight  plunge 
on  the  half-back  for  a  straight  buck  or  cross-buck  the  quarter 
should  never  fail  to  place  the  ball  in  the  stomach  of  the  man 
who  is  to  carry  it.  This  is  a  cardinal  point  in  the  work  of  the 
quarter  and  too  much  emphasis  cannot  be  laid  on  it. 

If  the  full-back  is  to  make  a  straight  buck  on  the  right  of 
center,  the  quarter  should  pivot  on  his  left  foot,  quarter  of  the 
way  round,  and  with  his  left  hand  place  the  ball  in  the  pit  of 
the  stomach  of  the  full-back,  and  vice  versa  if  he  bucks  on  the 
left  side.  The  same  theory  holds  true  in  passing  to  the  half- 
backs for  straight  bucks  and  cross-bucks,  only  on  the  cross-bucks 
he  steps  to  the  side  and  back,  and  places  the  ball  in  the  stomach 
as  before.  Of  course,  in  the  wide  end  runs  and  trick  plays  this 
cannot  be  carried  out,  but  should  be  always  borne  in  mind  by 
the  quarter-back. 

This  point  of  passing  is  very  essential  to  good  team  work,  for 
nothing  will  slow  up  a  team  quicker  than  poor  passing,  which  is 
of  course  the  fault  of  the  quarter-back.  If  the  players  begin  to 
lose  confidence  in  the  quarter-back  they  will  not  put  the  same 
dash  and  drive  in  their  work  as  they  would  otherwise.  Then 
again,  the  quarter-back  is  only  a  cog  in  the  great  machine,  and 
he  should  fulfill  his  part  of  the  work  without  any  hesitation  or 
delay. 

TACKLING. 

As  a  general  rule  the  offensive  quarter-back  plays  defensive 
full-back  on  defence  and  as  such  innumerable  opportunities 
present  themselves   for  him  to  test  his  own  tackling  ability. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  61 

When  playing  the  above  position  on  defence  it  is  best  to  play 
from  fifteen  to  twenty  yards  back  of  the  scrimmage,  thus 
enabling  the  quarter  to  stop  a  runner  in  the  open  field  without 
any  considerable  gain,  and  because  it  is  easier  to  stop  him  then 
than  it  would  be  if  he  once  obtained  a  good  start. 

Too  much  time  cannot  be  spent  in  practicing  tackling.  It  is 
a  fundamental  requisite  of  his  position  and  should  be  perfected 
by  him,  more  than  by  any  one  else. 

The  quarter  should  never  run  up  on  a  man,  when  he  once  gets 
loose,  for  it  is  the  easiest  thing  in  the  world  to  dodge  a  man 
when  he  is  coming  up  to  meet  you.  The  tackier  must  wait  for 
the  runner  to  come  to  him,  and  then  by  some  original  schemes, 
such  as  a  little  jumping  sideways,  endeavor  to  hit  him  about  the 
thighs,  as  the  rule  forbidding  tackling  below  the  knees  is  being 
enforced.  The  quarter  must  be  able  to  tackle  with  both  shoulders 
equally  well,  and  should  not  favor  one  shoulder,  as  is  quite 
frequently  the  case. 

It  is  generally  better  to  corner  the  runner,  if  possible,  between 
the  side-line  and  yourself,  and  when  you  are  absolutely  sure  you 
have  him  safe,  you  should  make  a  running  dive  at  him,  thus 
enabling  the  tackier  to  break  any  stiff-arm  and  prevent  the 
runner  from  dodging.  Nothing  is  more  distasteful  to  the  fol- 
lower of  foot  ball  than  to  see  a  half-hearted  attempt  at  tackling, 
such  as  a  tackle  around  the  neck  or  by  the  arm.  From  such 
attempts  as  these  injuries  are  inflicted,  occasionally  of  a  serious 
nature. 

The  defensive  quarter  of  course  is  forced  by  circumstances  to 
tackle  a  runner  wherever  he  can.  The  player  in  this  position 
should  be  a  man  of  experience,  intelligence  and  strength.  He 
should  be  able  to  size  up  situations  quickly  and  direct  his  team 
mates  accordingly.  An  experienced,  defensive  quarter  is  occa- 
sionally able  to  foresee  a  certain  play  by  the  actions  of  the  backs 
of  the  opposing  team.  Not  unfrequently  does  an  experienced 
half  or  full-back  point  with  his  eyes  or  feet  in  the  direction  of 
a  play  and  naturally  more  so  in  the  case  of  the  inexperienced 
player.  One  great  point,  which  he  must  continually  bear  in 
mind,  is  not  to  go  into  a  play  too  quickly,  for  it  may  happen 
that  it  is  a  fake  or  split  interference  play,  and,  naturally,  to  get 
the  defensive  quarter  drawn  in,  adds  to  the  value  of  the  play. 
He  must  always  throw  himself  under  a  pile  and  never  try  to 
resist   a   mass    standing   up. 

As  a  general  rule  the  play  on  a  third  down  is  either  a  kick 
or  a  buck  through  the  line  and  after  the  game  is  fifteen  minutes 
old  the  man  backing  up  the  line  should  know  what  is  going  to 
happen. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRART.  63 

INTERFERENCE. 

The  quarter-back  is  quite  an  important  man  in  the  interference 
and  much  can  be  said  about  his  work  in  this  particular  branch. 
In  straight  phmges  by  the  halves  or  full-back,  he  should  nut 
attempt  to  get  in  ahead  of  the  runner,  or  immediately  behind, 
because  he  thus  has  a  tendency  to  clog  and  slow  up  the  play. 
The  quicker  the  play  gets  up  to  the  line  of  scrimmage,  the  more 
value  it  has,  and  the  quarter  can  follow  and  add  his  weight  and 
strength  when  the  play  has  met  some  opposition,  but  not  until 
then.  When  the  quarter  plays  thus  he  is  practically  a  free  man 
and  must  be  constantly  alert  for  fumbles,  which  occasionally 
happen  and  frequently  result  seriously.  In  end-running,  it  is  a 
cardinal  principle  for  the  quarter  to  head  the  interference. 

When  the  half-backs  are  called  upon  for  cross-bucks  off  the 
tackles  the  quarter  should  buckle  on  to  them  around  the  hips 
and  help  them  along  to  the  best  of  his  ability,  always  placing  the 
ball  in  their  stomachs.  It  is  a  mighty  good  point  to  practice  the 
whirling  form  on  this  play,  that  is,  when  the  player  has  struck 
some  opposition,  twist  or  whirl  him  in  such  a  way  that  he  will 
free  himself  from  the  tackier.  The  quarter  should  practice 
dragging  a  great  deal,  because  it  is  a  mighty  good  point,  and  in 
a  crucial  game  every  inch  of  ground  counts. 

In  open-field  interference  the  interferer  shcnild  not  hesitate  to 
leave  his  feet  to  take  a  man  out  of  the  way,  espcn.illy  it  the 
opponent  is  the  defensive  full-back.  Of  course,  the  intrrferer 
must  make  sure  of  his  man,  and  this  can  best  be  done  by  getting 
him  between  the  side-line  and  himself,  then  making  a  lunge  for 
him,  so  that  his  body  will  strike  the  tackier  about  the  knees. 
But  the  interferer  must  be  certain  of  his  position  before  the 
lunge  is  made,  as  the  tackier  may  side-step  the  interferer  as  he 
takes  the  lunge.  This  is  the  surest  way  there  is  for  taking  a 
man  out  of  the  way,  and  it  is  a  form  that  can  be  accomplished 
with  practice.  Work  on  the  tackling  dummy  is  mighty  good 
for  this. 

HANDLING    PUNTS. 

The  new  rule  which  allows  any  player  possession  of  the  ball 
after  it  has  been  kicked  will  undoubtedly  put  a  premium  on 
quarter-backs  who  are  perfected  in  this  branch  of  the  game.  No 
one  rale  can  be  laid  down  telling  a  player  how  to  catch  a  foot 
ball,  but  numerous  suggestions  can  be  made  upon  this  point. 

A  punted  ball  has  no  definite  direction,  for  it  may  be  diverted 
from  its  course  by  numerous  air  currents  which  come  from 
openings  in  the  grandstands  or  other  sources,  thus  making  it 
very   hard   to   judge   the   ball   accurately.      Of   course   the   ball    is 


»  a 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  65 

caught  against  the  body,  if  properly  judged,  with  the  aid  of  the 
arms  and  hands.  It  is  also  a  good  thing  to  bring  the  leg  in 
action,  by  pulling  it  up  in  such  a  manner  as  not  to  allow  the  ball 
to  drop  downward  after  being  caught. 

The  quarter-back  should  pay  no  attention  whatever  to  the  men 
who  are  coming  down  to  tackle  him.  He  must  make  sure  of  the 
ball  and  then  of  the  men  who  are  coming  down  to  tackle  him. 
When  he  has  caught  the  ball  he  should  carry  it  in  such  a  way 
that  the  point  is  well  up  under  the  arm  and  the  other  point 
resting  in  the  palm  of  his  hand.  When  he  is  tackled  he  must 
be  absolutely  sure  to  hold  on  to  the  ball  by  wrapping  both  arms 
around  it.  It  is  a  rather  poor  policy  to  attempt  to  catch  a  ball 
on  the  run,  as  the  chances  of  missing  it  are  greater  than  the 
chances  of  catching  it.  When  carrying  the  ball  the  runner  should 
never  run  straight  into  a  man,  because  an  injury  is  easier  averted 
by  side-stepping  and  getting  the  force  of  the  blow  on  the  side. 

Kick-offs  are  different  from  punts  in  that  they  have  a  definite 
direction,  thus  making  them  easier  to  catch.  It  is  best  to  catch 
kick-offs  on  the  run,  if  possible,  because  they  are  much  simpler 
to  handle  and  the  catcher  runs  very  little  risk  of  dropping  them, 
and  then,  again,  he  is  moving  rather  fast,  covering  the  ground 
and  in  a  better  position  to  dodge.  Always  get  possession  of  the 
ball  if  it  goes  behind  the  goal  line,  for  if  the  opponents  get  it, 
it  is  a  touchdown  for  them. 

GIVING    SIGNALS. 

The  quarter-back  in  giving  signals  must  give  them  loud  and 
clear.  The  fundamental  point  in  this  branch  of  the  quarter's 
work  is  his  utmost  familiarity  with  the  signals.  He  must  have 
them  continually  at  his  tongue's  end  and  he  should  help  other 
members  of  the  team  memorize  them. 

If  a  signal  is  to  be  repeated  the  quarter  must  rise  from  a 
crouching  to  a  standing  position  and  give  the  signal  with  the 
same  clearness  and  distinctness  as  before.  He  must  never  turn 
to  either  side  and  repeat  the  signal,  for  he  may  unconsciously 
give  the  play  away.  When  a  repetition  of  the  signal  is  called 
for  it  is  best  to  turn  around  and  face  the  backs  and  then  turn 
back  and  give  it  to  the  line.  Especially  is  this  true  on  a  day 
when  there  is  plenty  of  noise,  and  for  this  reason  I  favor  series 
plays,  when  two  or  three  plays  can  be  run  off  from  one  signal, 
thus  giving  a  team  the  advantage  of  fast  play. 

PUNTING  AND   DROP-KICKING. 

It  is  a  rather  difficult  matter  to  describe  how  to  kick  a  foot 
ball  accurately.     Kicking  applies  to  punting  as  well  as  scoring 


] — A  drop-kjck.  .Shows  that  the  follow-through  is  considerably  less,  giving 
less  distance  Imt  greater  accuracj-.  2 — Illustrates  the  following-through  on 
a   long   punt. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  67 

from  the  field,  but  the  two  branches  of  this  part  of  the  game  are 
absolutely  distinct. 

It  is  hardly  necessary,  I  suppose,  to  explain  that  a  punt  differs 
from  a  drop-kick  in  that  when  the  former  is  nmde  the  ball  is 
dropped  and  kicked  before  it  touches  the  ground.  In  a  drop- 
kick  the  ball  is  dropped  to  the  ground  and  kicked  just  as  it  is 
rising  on  the  bound. 

In  the  last  few  years,  with  the  development  of  place-kicking, 
drop-kicking  has  to  a  certain  extent  gone  out  of  use.  So  far  as 
I  am  concerned  I  prefer  drop-kicking  to  place-kicking.  In  the 
latter  form  of  scoring  the  responsibility  is  divided  between  two 
men — the  one  who  holds  the  ball  and  the  actual  kicker.  This 
division  of  responsibility  of  course  doubles  the  chances  of 
failure,  for  not  only  must  the  kicker  do  his  work  accurately  and 
quickly,  but  the  man  who  holds  the  ball  also  must  make  no 
mistake. 

Just  what  is  the  exact  secret  of  successful  kicking  is  as  hard 
for  me  to  explain  as  for  any  one  else.  No  two  kickers  use  abso- 
lutely the  same  method.  I  know  that  when  I  was  first  learning 
to  kick  I  was  frequently  told  by  good  coaches  that  my  method 
w^as  all  wrong. 

The  two  most  important  points  about  kicking,  whether  it  is 
punting  or  drop-kicking,  are  accuracy  and  speed.  No  matter 
how  good  a  kicker  a  man  may  be — no  matter  how  accurate  even— 
if  he  is  not  fast  in  getting  the  ball  away  he  is  practically  help- 
less. Therefore,  a  man  learning  to  kick  should  endeavor  first 
and  foremost  to  attain  speed.  It  must  be  the  right  kind  of 
speed,  too.  The  kind  that  is  best  understood  by  the  phrase 
"make  haste  slowly."  A  man  who  loses  his  sureness  in  attempt- 
ing to  get  speed  is  just  as  bad  as  a  man  who  is  so  slow  as  to 
have  his  kick  blocked. 

The  kicker  should  always  try  to  make  a  kick  in  just  the  same 
space  of  time,  whether  he  is  merely  practicing  on  a  clear  field  or 
actually  kicking  from  behind  the  line  in  a  game.  He  should  try 
and  feel  just  as  if  there  were  no  one  trying  to  break  through  the 
line  and  block  his  kick.  He  should  know  he  has  just  about  so 
many  seconds  in  which  to  get  the  ball  away  and  he  must  take 
all  that  time  to  increase  the  accuracy  of  the  kick. 

Accuracy,  after  a  certain  point  in  the  development  of  kicking, 
is  better  than  distance.  An  accurate  punter  can  generally  place 
the  ball  so  that  a  man  on  the  opposing  team  who  catches  it  is 
almost  sure  to  be  tackled  before  he  can  run  back  any  great 
distance.  On  the  other  hand,  as  one  frequently  sees  in  a  game, 
some  punter  gets  great  distance,  but  the  man  who  catches  the 
ball  is  able  to  run  it  back. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  69 

In  punting,  the  kicker  should  always  have  a  good  idea  of  just 
where  the  opposing  back-field  men  are  waiting  to  receive  the 
ball.  It  should  be  his  idea  to  get  the  greatest  possible  distance, 
at  the  same  time  trying  to  put  the  ball  where  it  is  hardest  for 
the  opponent  to  get  it  and  where  the  ends  on  his  own  team  will 
have  the  least  difficulty  in  making  a  tackle. 

All  this  applies  to  punting,  but  although  this  is  the  most 
important  branch  in  the  kicking  end  of  the  game,  it  is  the  drop- 
kicking  that  appeals  to  the  spectator.  A  large  proportion  of 
every  crowd  at  a  game  knows  really  little  about  the  finer  points 
of  foot  ball.  This  class  of  spectators  does  not  realize  how 
important  punting  is.  A  man  is  apt  to  forget  that  a  single  punt 
may  gain  forty  or  fifty  yards  in  a  few  seconds,  which  it  has 
taken  the  opposing  team  many  minutes  of  hard  play  to  obtain. 

This  is  not  the  case  with  drop-kicking.  If  the  drop-kick  is 
successful,  it  gains  four  points,  and  the  spectators  appreciate  it 
more  than  any  other  kind  of  kicking,  just  as  they  are  apt  to 
think  more  of  the  effort  which  gains  the  last  yard  for  a  touch- 
down than  of  a  much  longer  gain  made  earlier. 

As  I  have  already  said,  it  is  rather  hard  to  explain  how  to 
make  drop-kicks.  In  making  such  a  kick  the  kicker  should  get 
the  ball  on  a  high  pass,  about  shoulder  high,  then  turn  a  little 
to  the  right  before  dropping  the  ball  to  the  ground.  Then  just 
as  it  rises  on  the  bound  he  is  in  a  position  to  swing  at  it  with 
his  right  leg  full  force. 

Before  making  a  drop-kick  it  is  always  well  for  the  man  who 
is  about  to  attempt  it  to  look  at  the  ground  about  him  closely, 
so  that  he  may  avoid  any  rough  places.  The  slightest  inaccuracy 
in'  dropping  the  ball  or  in  kicking  affects  the  accuracy  of  one's 
aim  enormously.  Not  only  must  the  ball  be  dropped  just  right, 
but  it  must  be  kicked  at  just  the  right  second.  The  toe  and 
instep  should  come  in  contact  with  the  ball  at  the  same  time  and 
the  square-toed  shoe  is  of  very  great  value  in  accomplishing 
this  end. 

However,  when  all  is  said  in  explanation  and  when  the  most 
accurate  pictures  of  drop-kicking  have  been  studied,  it  remains 
for  the  beginner,  who  wants  to  learn  how  to  do  it,  to  get  a  foot 
ball  and  try.  That  is  the  only  way.  No  explanation  or  coaching 
will  make  up  for  experience. 


W.  T.  REID,  JR. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


PLAY  OF  THE  BACKS 

BY    W.    T.    REID,    JR., 

Full-back  Harvard  Foot  Ball  Team  of  1899  and  Head 
Coach  Harvard  'Varsity  Foot  Ball  Team  for  1905. 

r^ 

IISI3lllll3tll3l3 

Properly  speaking,  the  term  "backs"  refers  to  the  quarter- 
back, the  two  half-backs  and  the  full-back.  This  article,  how- 
ever, will  deal  only  with  the  three  latter  positions,  leaving  the  very 
technical  work  of  the  quarter-back  to  some  other  writer. 

The  three  backs,  as  we  shall  term  them,  are  closely  associated 
in  everything  that  they  do.  On  the  offence  they  alternate  in 
carrying  the  ball  and  in  pushing  each  other  along,  while  on  the 
defence  at  least  two  of  them,  and  sometimes  all  three,  are  called 
upon  to  reinforce  the  rush  line.  And  they  are  usually  of  about 
the  same  size  and  weight. 

With  all  these  points  of  similarity  there  is  much  that  belongs 
to  each  separate  position  that  goes  to  make  it  unwise  for  a  back 
to  attempt  to  play  in  more  than  one  position.  For  instance,  if 
the  right  half  attempts  to  play  at  left  half  he  must  accustom 
himself  to  the  use  of  the  right  side  of  his  body  in  interference 
instead  of  his  left,  to  starting  toward  the  right  side  of  the  line 
for  many  of  his  main  plays  instead  of  to  the  left,  to  receiving  the 
ball  from  the  quarter-back  from  another  angle,  and  in  general  to 
an  almost  exactly  opposite  way  of  doing  things  from  that  to 
which  he  has  been  accustomed.  From  these  observations  it  must 
be  clear  that  while  the  duties  of  the  various  positions  are  just 
different  enough  to  make  it  unwise  to  change  players  about,  they 
are  nevertheless  so  nearly  alike  fundamentally  as  to  make  it  pos- 
sible to  deal  with  them  as  a  whole,  thereby  saving  much  repetition 
and  unnecessary  explanation. 

QUALIFICATIONS. 

The  mental  qualifications  of  a  good  back  are  first  of  all  that 
he  shall  enter  into  his  work  with  the  proper  spirit.  Unless  he 
has  this  spirit— that  is,  unless  he  is  willing  to  subordinate  his 
personal  wishes  to  the  general  welfare  of  the  team,  and  what 
is  more,  to  do  so  heartily  and  enthusiastically — he  cannot  hope 
ever  to  be  a  great  player,  even  though  he  have  marked  indi- 
vidual ability  along  every  line  of  play.    Team  play  is  the  essence 


•'^^f^. 


/^ 


I 


1-FINISH    OF    KICK.        2— GOOD    ARI\I   DEFENSE    TO    LOW    TACKLE. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  73 

of  successful  foot  ball,  and  he  who  is  looking  first  of  all  to  his 
own  interests  will  never  make  a  "team"  player;  he  will  not  con- 
tribute his  share  to  the  esprit  de  corps  of  the  backs,  and  he  will 
never  "fight"  for  all  he  is  worth  from  the  beginning  of  a  game 
until  the  end. 

Besides  having  the  proper  spirit  he  should  be  heartily  co- 
operative ;  he  should  be  full  of  aggressiveness  both  on  the  offence 
and  defence;  full  of  sand  and  grit,  and  imbued  with  a  rea- 
sonable amount  of  judgment.  Physically  a  back  should  be  com- 
pactly built,  strong  and  quick,  never  slow  nor  clumsy,  and  should 
weigh  anywhere  from  170  to  190  pounds.  Formerly  it  was  not 
necessary  to  have  such  heavy  backs,  owing  to  the  fact  that  one 
or  more  linemen  could  always  be  used  to  do  the  heavy  line- 
breaking  work.  Now,  however,  when  the  ball  must  be  carried 
over  the  greater  portion  of  the  field  by  a  limited  number  of  men — 
the  necessity  for  heavy,  powerful  backs  to  do  this,  must  be  evi- 
dent. In  earlier  days,  before  the  defensive  side  of  the  game 
came  to  be  so  well  understood,  and  before  special  styles  of  de- 
fence were  devised  to  meet  special  forms  of  offense — it  was 
generally  planned  to  have  at  least  one  of  the  backs  a  good  end 
runner.  This  provision  is  not  so  important  now  as  it  once  was, 
owing  to  the  fact  that  end  running  is  no  longer  practiced  with 
old  time  success.  The  defence  has  mastered  the  end  running 
game,  unless  indeed  it  consist  of  skillfully  devised  deception.  In 
its  place  has  come  the  demand  for  heavy  line  buckers  and  plung- 
ers. Hence,  it  is  well  for  teams  of  to-day  to  choose  for  backs, 
those  men  who  can  as  nearly  as  possible  perform  the  task  of  the 
linemen  of  the  past  two  or  three  years.  If,  in  meeting  these  re- 
quirements, an  end  runner  turns  up — ^well  and  good.  The  aver- 
age end-running  of  the  present  day  is  quite  as  likely  to  lose 
ground  as  it  is  to  gain  it,  and  this  is  particulary  true  when  the 
opposing  tackles  play  well  out  from  their  guards.  Of  course 
end  runs  will  always  be  used  strategically,  to  prevent  the  op- 
ponents from  concentrating  their  defence  on  the  bucking,  but 
very  seldom,  with  the  idea  of  making  consistent  ground.  Finally, 
the  back  should  have  the  knack  of  not  getting  hurt.  Some  men 
have  this  to  a  marked  degee,  and  almost  never  get  hurt,  while 
others  are  equally  unfortunate  and  are  constantly  being  injured. 
As  team  play  is  dependent  upon  "drill,"  and  that  in  its  turn  is 
dependent  upon  the  individual,  it  is  easy  to  see  why  an  "immune" 
back  is  most  desirable. 

FUNDAMENTAL    POINTS.  ' 

Too  much  emphasis  cannot  be  placed  upon  the  necessity  for 
thorough  drill  in  fundamentals.  These  fundamentals  consist  of 
falling  on  the  ball,  passing  it,  kicking,  catching  and  carrying  it. 


1-COACH    STAGG    OF    THE    UNIVERSITY    OF    CHICAGO.      2-STAGG 


2— STAGG.    JR. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  76 

"Falling  on  the  ball,"  or,  more  properly  speaking,  falling  around 
the  ball,  should  be  practiced  while  the  ball  is  at  rest,  and  then, 
while  it  is  in  motion,  to  the  right,  left,  front  and  rear.  In  any 
case  the  player  should  be  very  careful  not  to  dive  at  it  in  such  a 
way  as  to  dive  the  top  of  his  shoulder  into  the  ground,  for  a  bad 
bruise  or  injury  is  likely  to  result. 

Neither  should  he  ever  attempt  to  fall  flat  upon  the  ball  in 
order  to  prevent  injury  to  his  wind  or  his  chest;  instead,  he 
should  fall  flat,  either  so  that  his  weight  shall  be  on  his  elbows  or 
knees,  or  else  so  that  his  body  at  his  waist  is  doubled  up  around 
the  ball,  which  he  shall  hug  closely  with  his  arms  and  hands. 

In  diving  for  the  ball  the  player  should  dive  as  closely  to  the 
ground  as  possible,  thus  preventing  an  opponent  from  getting 
under  him.  He  should  always  see  to  it  that  his  body  is  between 
the  ball  and  an  opponent.  These  points  make  for  added  safety 
and  protection. 

Backs  should  have  enough  practice  in  passing  balls  to  feel 
thoroughly  at  home  with  them.  This  is  especially  true  under  the 
new  rules.  They  cannot  be  sure  of  this  unless  they  handle  new 
balls,  wet  balls,  old  balls  and  dry  balls,  and  unless  they  handle 
them  incessantly. 

Unless  this  is  the  case  a  team  is  likely  to  find  itself  with- 
out a  kicker,  perhaps  in  the  midst  of  some  important  game. 
And  the  ordinary  need  for  a  kicker  has  been  increased  greatly 
by  the  changes  in  the  rules,  which  make  it  necessary  to  advance 
the  ball  over  the  central  portion  of  the  field,  with  only  four 
inen  behind  the  line — which  is,  of  course,  a  much  slower  and 
less  powerful  way  than  that  practiced  year  before  last.  Here 
it  is  that  a  superior  kicker  can  be  of  inestimable  service  to  his 
team — since  in  no  way  can  big  gains  be  so  quickly  or  easily  made 
as  through  the  kicking  game.  Therefore  it  is  of  the  greatest 
importance  that  as  many  of  the  backs  as  possible  should  be  good 
kickers,  or  at  least  punters. 

Indeed  a  good  kicking  game,  if  successful,  is  certain  to  bring 
wath  it  quicker  and  more  frequent  scoring  than  almost  any  other 
style  of  play.  This  is  due,  of  course,  to  the  enormous  distances 
which  good  kicks  cover,  together  with  the  consequent  saving  of 
time  and  energy.  Even  more  attention  should  be  devoted  to 
catching,  for  almost  nothing  in  foot  ball  may  result  so  disas- 
trously as  a  bad  fumble  in  the  back  field.  Unless  a  back  is  sure 
at  catching,  or  shows  signs  of  becoming  sure,  with  practice  and 
experience,  he  should  never  be  allowed  to  attempt  catching. 
Bungling  work  in  the  back  field  is  the  most  demoralizing  thing 
than  can  happen  to  any  team. 

Carrying  the  ball  is  the  main  function  of  the  backs,  hence  the 
need  of  knowing  how  to  carry  it  safely.     This  depends  upon  the 


76  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

way  in  which  the  ball  is  held.  For  end  runs  one  end  of  the  ball 
should  be  tucked  under  the  arm — not  too  far  under,  so  that  it  can 
be  knocked  out — while  the  other  end  should  be  firmly  grasped 
and  covered  with  the  hand.  In  bucking,  the  ball  should  be  held 
in  the  pocket  formed  by  the  stomach  and  legs,  as  the  runner 
crouches,  with  both  hands,  though  in  case  a  back  feels  that  he 
has  the  ball  secure  there  is  no  reason  why  he  should  not  use 
one  hand  to  ward  off  opponents.  In  the  case  of  end  runs  the 
back  should  be  prepared  to  ward  off  runners  with  either  hand, 
changing  the  ball  when  necessary  from  one  side  to  the  other. 
And  whether  bucking  or  running,  a  back  should  never  allow 
himself  to  loosen  this  hold  on  the  ball,  owing  to  the  necessity 
of  giving  much  attention  to  passing  some  particular  opponent. 
The  grip  on  the  ball  should  be  automatic  and  vise-like.  Where 
a  back  is  uncertain  of  his  hold  he  may  get  good  practice  by 
bouncing  a  ball  against  a  wall  and  then  clapping  it  at  once  into 
position  on  the  return. 

It  is  of  course  necessary  that  the  backs  should  tackle  and 
interfere  well.  This  means  that  they  should  both  tackle  and 
interfere  low — the  only  difference  between  the  two  being  that  in 
case  of  a  tackle  the  runner  takes  hold  of  his  man,  while  in  the 
interference  he  does  all  that  the  tackier  does  except  take  hold. 
A  high  tackier  or  interferer  has  no  place  behind  the  line,  par- 
ticularly in  these  days. 

Finally,  no  back  can  be  effective  who  does  not  start  quickly. 
An  offence  which  is  so  slow  in  reaching  its  object  as  to  allow 
a  concentration  of  opponents  at  that  spot  before  the  play  hits  is 
of  course  worthless.  The  attack  must  be  quick  and  hard.  For 
this  reason  the  backs  should  constantly  practice  getting  off 
quickly  and  getting  up  their  maximum  speed  instantly.  There 
are  several  ways  of  starting.  Some  backs  stand  in  a  crouching 
position,  with  one  foot  a  little  in  the  rear  of  the  other,  and  with 
the  knees  turned  well  in.  This  enables  them  to  start  to  the 
right  or  left  or  to  the  front  without  a  moment's  loss  of  time  and 
with  great  initial  power.  Other  backs  assume  a  sprinting  start. 
The  sprint  start  position,  with  only  one  hand  touching  the  ground, 
and  that  only  sufficiently  to  steady  the  runner,  is  at  the  present 
time  generally  conceded  to  be  the  most  effective.  Both  ways  are 
good ;  in  fact,  any  way  is  good  that  will  enable  a  back  to  get  off 
quickly  and  in  any  direction.  The  things  to  be  avoided  are  a 
momentary  straightening  of  the  back  at  the  instant  of  the  start, 
and  a  short  backward  step.  In  case  the  latter  step  seems  neces- 
sary the  back  should  take  his  position  with  one  foot  back  to  begin 
with,  thus  making  it  unnecessary  to  take  an  additional  one. 
There  should  be  no  backward  motion  of  either  foot 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  77 

In  general,  backs  should  exercise  extreme  care  to  prevent 
unevenness  in  starting.  Starting  too  soon  or  too  late  is  only 
productive  of  fumbles  and  offside  play,  to  say  nothing  of  the 
upsetting  influence  which  it  produces  throughout  the  team. 
.  Along  with  his  fundamentals,  every  back  should  spend  con- 
siderable time  in  learning  the  rules  of  the  game.  This  part  of 
the  work  is  often  entirely  neglected,  and  much  to  the  detriment 
of  the  individual,  for  how  can  a  man  play  a  game  well  or  intel- 
ligently when  he  does  not  even  know  the  rules  governing  the 
game?  It  is  an  altogether  too  common  sight  to  see  teams  let 
opportunities  slip  through  ignorance  of  the  rules ;  indeed,  such 
ignorance  has  on  more  than  one  occasion  actually  cost  a  team 
its  game,  and  such  neglect  has  even  existed  in  some  of  the  larger 
university  teams. 

A  foot  ball  player  is  frequently  called  upon  most  unexpectedly, 
to  decide  instantly  upon  some  question  of  the  game,  and  just  as 
frequently  his  decision  or  lack  of  decision  enables  him  either  to 
do  the  right  or  the  wrong  thing  and  thus  either  secure  an  added 
advantage  or  else  precipitate  an  added  disadvantage  upon  his 
side. 

Every  back  should  be  absolutely  familiar  with  the  distinctions 
between  a  "safety,"  a  "touchback"  and  a  "touchdown."  He 
should  know  what  constitutes  a  "fair  catch" — what  a  violation 
of  it,  and  so  on  throughout  the  rules. 

And  after  the  rules  have  been  mastered,  a  player  should  be 
told  to  make  his  play  always,  in  case  of  doubt — and  then  refer 
to  the  officials — and  under  no  consideration  to  stop  because  he 
hears  a  whistle  blow  or  because  he  hears  some  one  yelling  for 
him  to  stop.  A  player  can  never  make  a  mistake  in  carrying  out 
this  suggestion,  and  may,  on  some  occasion,  save  himself  a  bad 
blunder  through  a  misunderstanding. 


The  position  of  back  is  one  of  the  most  exhaustive  ones  in  all 
foot  ball.  At  no  other  position  is  there  so  little  opportunity  for 
rest  or  let-up.  It  is  go,  go,  all  the  time,  first  with  the  ball,  then 
in  the  interference,  then  on  defense.  It  is  necessary,  then,  that 
a  back  should  always  be  in  the  very  best  of  condition,  never  over- 
worked, always  full  of  vigor  and  life.  It  is  better  to  underwork 
a  back  than  to  overwork  him. 

Of  the  two  half-backs  on  a  team'  it  is  generally  planned  that 
one  shall  be  a  good  end  runner,  the  other  a  good  plunger  or 
bucker.  Such  an  arrangement  gives  more  all  around  possibilities 
to  an  eleven,  particularly  where  there  is  an  opportunity  for  broken 
field  running. 


78  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

On  the  offense  the  position  of  the  backs  will  depend  tipon 
the  style  of  game  that  is  adopted.  Sometimes  they  are  played 
a  full  five  yards  behmd  the  rush  line,  on  other  occasions 
they  are  played  a  scant  three,  while  on  still  other  occasions 
they  form  at  even  greater  or  less  distance.  The  possibili- 
ties of  formation  are  never  ending,  especially  under  the  new 
rules  allowing  forward  passing.  When  in  position,  and  just 
previous  to  starting,  the  backs  should  take  every  precaution 
to  prevent  giving  the  direction  of  the  play  away  by  uncon- 
scious glances,  movements  or  "leanings."  It  is  also  well  for 
the  back  to  save  himself  whenever  he  can  from  the  nervous 
tension  of  prolonged  waiting.  Many  backs  subject  themselves 
to  some  such  strain  by  getting  onto  their  toes  several  moments 
before  the  ball  is  to  be  put  in  play,  or  by  not  "letting  up"  at 
the  call  of  "time."  This  may  be  avoided  if  the  back  will 
"key  himself  up"  just  at  the  last  moment.  But  above  all  a 
back  should  be  steady.  He  should  never  in  all  his  play  slow 
up  for  his  interference,  or  even  allow  any  other  back  to  be 
slowed  up  by  dilatoriness  on  his  own  part.  He  should  start 
instantly  and  "dig" — never  letting  up  an  instant  for  any- 
thing. He  should  play  with  indomitable  spirit.  If  he  fails  to 
gain  the  first  try  he  should  grit  his  teeth  and  make  it  gain  the 
second. 

In  end  running  a  back  should  be  careful  not  to  run  too  close 
to  his  interference  when  in  case  the  interference  is  upset  he  is 
likely  to  fall  over  his  protectors.  Instead  he  should  run  with 
a  little  interval  between  himself  and  his  interference,  thus  giving 
himself  a  chance  to  see  where  they  are  going  and  to  take  instant 
advantage  of  any  upset.  Where  possible  it  is  well  for  a  back  to 
run  low  so  long  as  he  can  see  where  he  is  going,  for  by  so  doing 
he  is  likely  to  cause  his  opponents  a  moment's  delay  in  locating 
him.  When  tackled  he  should  aim  to  fall  forward.  To  this 
end  he  should  run  with  his  body  slanting  forward,  where  it  is 
exceedingly  difficult  for  an  opponent  to  overcome  the  combined 
power  of  gravity  and  the  player's  efforts.  After  falling,  a  back 
should  never  hold  the  ball  out  at  arm's  reach,  as  there  is  danger 
that  it  may  be  stolen  from  him. 

In  bucking,  one  of  the  very  important  points  to  be  kept  in 
mind  is  that  of  keeping  the  eyes  open.  A  back  who  closes  his 
eyes  as  he  makes  his  plunge  is  likely  to  fall  flat  on  his  face 
when  an  opening  in  the  line  presents  itself  suddenly  where  he 
had  expected  to  find  the  passage  choked.  A  back  should  never 
allow  himself  to  hesitate  or  slow  up  as  he  strikes  the  line,  he 
should  strike  it  while  at  his  maximum  speed.  A  back  may  run 
high  or  low,  according  to  circumstances,  particularly  so  long  as 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  79 

he  keeps  his  feet — a  most  valuable  quality.  It  is  also  wise  for 
the  back  to  take  short  steps,  as  in  this  way  he  is  not  so  likely 
to  find  himself  too  much  spread  out  where  the  footing  is  hardly 
firm  and  where  it  is  almost  impossible  to  get  his  feet  under  him 
in  case  of  some  sudden  shove  or  push.  The  legs  should  accord- 
ingly be  bent  as  the  back  strikes  the  line,  because  in  this  way 
he  is  able  to  exert  much  lifting  power  in  case  of  need.  The 
arms  and  hands  should  also  be  used  to  make  progress.  Many 
backs  lose  much  of  their  effectiveness  because  they  utilize  only  a 
portion  of  their  power.  The  feet  should  ordinarily  be  kept  on 
the  ground,  because  only  when  they  are  there  are  they  of  much 
service.  When,  however,  there  is  an  imperative  need  of  making 
a  gain  of  a  foot  or  so  the  back  had  best  dive  at  the  line — this 
being  especially  applicable  to  the  full-back.  Hurdling  is  now 
absolutely  forbidden.  When  downed  after  a  buck — or  after 
any  play,  for  that  matter — a  back  should  instantly  straighten 
out  so  that  there  are  no  doubled  up  joints  for  succeeding 
players  to  fall  upon.  Where  a  back  is  attempting  to  assist 
a  fellow  player  along  he  should  aim  to  get  him  low  and 
boost  him  along  with  his  shoulders,  rarely  with  the  hands. 
And  under  no  circumstances  should  he  give  him  a  final  shove 
in  the  neighborhood  of  the  shoulders,  for  this  is  certain  to  cause 
the  runner  to  topple  forward.  In  case  a  back  is  tackled  and  seems 
about  to  fall  a  fellow  player  can  often  be  of  great  service  if 
he  will  grasp  the  runner  by  the  arm  or  elbow,  and  at  the  same 
time  that  he  holds  him  up  pull  him  forward.  It  frequently  hap- 
pens in  such  a  case  that  the  runner  will  shake  off  the  tackier  and 
make  an  additional  gain  of  several  feet  or  even  yards  before 
being  finally  downed. 

In  attempting  line  bucking  the  back  should  keep  his  chin 
close  in  to  his  neck,  so  as  to  prevent  having  his  head  twisted 
back  over  his  shoulder,  and  he  should  also  buck  with  the 
muscles  of  the  neck  held  tense.  This  will  tend  to  prevent  bad 
wrenches  of  the  neck  and  possibly  injury  to  it.  \yhen  in  the 
midst  of  a  line-bucking  play  which  has  resolved  itself  into  a 
pushing  contest  between  the  two  teams,  the  back  should  seek  an 
outlet  at  the  point  of  least  resistance,  usually  to  be  found  by 
feeling  his  way  in  different  directions,  and  in  general,  a  back 
should  not  raise  his  head  until  he  has  wholly  cleared  the  sec- 
ondary defense,  as  in  this  position  it  is  very  difficult  for  oppo- 
nents to  stop  him,  unless  they  have  a  clean  chance  for  a  tackle. 

In  case  a  back  feels  any  doubt  about  the  signal  for  a  play,  he 
should  at  once  call  out.  "Signal."  Otherwise  collisions,  fumbles 
and  confusion  will  result.  And  no  matter  what  a  back  thinks,  he 
should  invariablv  follow  out  the  signal.     The  fault  is  not  his  if 


go  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC  HlBRART. 

the  play  does  not  gain,  but  it  is  absolutely  his  fault  if  he  does  not 
go  where  he  is  directed.    This  rule  should  be  absolute. 

Another  rule  which  should  be  invariably  followed  is  that  of 
never  running  back.  It  is  a  back's  function  to  advance  the  ball, 
If  he  is  unable  to  do  so  he  should  at  least  never  lose  ground. 

If  a  back  fumbles  he  should  fall  on  the  ball  at  once,  never 
attempting  to  pick  it  up  unless  it  bounces  high.  Attempting 
to  pick  up  a  fumbled  ball  is  only  making  a  bad  matter  worse. 
A  back  is  responsible  for  the  ball  if  it  comes  to  him,  and  he 
should  always  remember  that  the  possession  of  it  is  of  the  first 
importance. 

It  is  the  half-back's  duty  to  afford  proper  protection  to  his 
kicker.  He  should  afford  it.  He  should  also  be  reliable  in 
getting  any  particular  opponent  who  may  be  assigned  to  him 
to  keep  out  of  a  given  play  out  of  the  play.  He  should  put 
his  entire  strength  into  every  play  and  should  always  have 
his  "nose  on  the  bail."  He  should  follow  it  everywhere.  Mr. 
Forbes  has  hit  the  nail  on  the  head  in  this  respect  when  he 
says :  "A  man's  value  to  his  team  varies  as  the  square  of  his 
distance  from  the  ball." 

In  the  midst  of  play,  whether  on  the  offense  or  defense,  the 
backs  should  see  to  encourage  each  other  by  a  word,  a  touch  or 
a  look.  Such  simple  though  effective  aids  to  thorough  sym- 
pathy and  harmony  between  them  should  never  be  overlooked. 
A  hearty  word  of  confidence  spoken  immediately  after  a  bad 
fumble  or  other  blunder  will  always  cause  the  unfortunate 
player  to  put  new  life  and  determination  into  his  work,  while 
a  bit  of  cutting  sarcasm  will  drive  him  to  anger  or  else  dis- 
hearten him.  When  off  the  field  a  back  should  never  allow 
himself  to  make  unfavorable  comments  on  any  of  his  fellow 
players,  unless  indeed  it  be  to  the  coach  or  captain.  Nothing  is 
so  likely  to  spoil  relations  among  players  as  criticism — offered 
behind  the  back.  Certain  annoyances  should  be  borne  for  the 
sake  of  the  team,  even  though  they  may  be  at  times  very 
exasperating.  When  a  fellow  back  or  fellow  player  is  injured  and 
confined  to  his  bed  nothing  will  so  contribute  to  hearty  relation- 
ship as  frequent  calls  and  anxious  solicitation  for  recovery. 

DEFENSE. 

On  the  defense  the  backs  and  ends  will  have  much  to  look 
after.  Each  has  his  particular  station  behind  the  line,  with  its 
primary  and  secondary  responsibilities.  Just  what  these  positions 
are,  whether  far  from  the  rush  line,  near  to  it  or  in  it,  must 
depend  upon  the  style  of  game  that  is  being  played.     Suffice  it  to 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  81 

say,  however,  that  all  styles  are  planned  to  the  same  end — to  stop 
opposing  plays. 

As  a  rule  the  backs  are  so  distributed  as  to  most  broadly 
cover  the  possible  openings  at  which  opponents  are  likely  to 
direct  their  plays.  Consequently  as  the  opponent's  offense  varies, 
so  should  the  defense.  Sometimes  it  seems  well  to  attempt  to 
meet  opponents  behind  their  own  line,  at  other  times  to  meet 
them  at  the  line,  and  on  other  occasions  still  to  meet  them 
behind  your  own  line.  Again,  a  back  is  sometimes  held  respon- 
sible for  a  run  around  the  opposite  side  of  the  line  from  that  on 
which  he  is  stationed,  so  that  the  various  combinations  of  respon- 
sibilities, due  to  the  tactics  of  any  particular  opponent,  are  never 
ending. 

Ordinarily  the  backs  are  looked  upon  as  forming  a  secondary 
line  of  defense.  In  such  a  case  they  must  exercise  great  care 
not  to  get  drawn  into  a  play  too  quickly,  and  yet  they  should 
be  equally  careful  not  to  wait  too  long  before  attacking  the 
play.  A  back  who  waits  too  long  is  as  bad  as  one  who  goes 
in  too  early.  A  happy  medium  is  what  should  be  aimed  at,  and 
it  can  be  obtained  only  by  constant  practice  and  vigilant  watch- 
fulness. To  exercise  this  vigilance  the  back  must  needs  stand 
high  enough  to  see  where  the  play  is  going,  and  at  the  same 
time  not  be  so  high  as  to  allow  of  being  struck  by  an  opponent 
while  in  an  extended  position.  The  instant  a  back  sizes  up  a  play 
he  should  get  as  soon  as  possible  to  the  point  of  attack,  watching 
carefully  for  trick  plays,  short  kicks  and  forward  passes  all  the 
while.  A  back  will  seldom  be  fooled  by  such  plays  if  he  will 
always  keep  a  close  eye  on  straggling  players,  and  remember  that 
the  ball,  not  the  motion  of  any  mass,  indicates  the  point  of  attack. 
Once  a  back  has  decided  to  attempt  to  head  off  a  runner  or  a 
play,  at  a  certain  point,  he  should  get  his  eye  on  the  man  with  the 
ball  and  keep  it  there,  never  losing  sight  of  him,  always  keeping 
his  position  in  the  interference  in  mind  and  never  allowing  him- 
self to  attempt  to  see  where  he  is  going.  That  part  of  it  will 
take  care  of  itself.  Such  precautions  as  those  just  outlined  will 
prevent  most  any  back  from  being  fooled  as  to  the  location  of 
the  ball— owing  to  a  temporary  relaxation  of  vigilance.  And 
vigilance  in  these  days  of  concealed  methods  of  passing  the  ball 
is  exceedingly  necessary.  In  attempting  to  stop  end  runs,  and  in 
fact  in  stopping  any  play,  a  back  should  never  allow  an  opponent 
to  hit  him  with  his  body;  he  should  keep  his  opponent  away  with 
his  arms.  A  back  has  no  business  to  allow  himself  to  get  hit. 
In  meeting  heavy  mass  plays  the  back  should  either  dive  at  the 
base  of  the  head  of  the  play,  grabbing  an  arm  full  of  legs,  or  m 
case  he  is  too  slow  in  getting  there  and  the  play  is  dragging  along 


82  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

he  should,  if  chance  offers,  seek  to  swing  the  head  of  the  play  to 
one  side  where  the  direct  line  of  pressure  is  broken  and  where  a 
momentary  delay  will  give  his  own  players  a  chance  to  down  the 
runner  before  the  opponents  have  a  chance  to  reorganize.  Many 
times  one  man  can  upset  a  mass  play  effectually,  where  had  he 
tried  to  tackle  one  of  the  players  he  would  have  been  thrown  off 
or  dragged  along  some  distance  further. 

The  question  as  to  whether  a  back  shall  break  through  and 
attempt  to  tackle  behind  an  opponent's  line  is  a  very  difficult  one 
to  treat.  Sometimes,  where  a  back  is  strong  on  the  defense  and 
the  opposing  line  is  weak  it  is  advisable.  But  where  the  opposing 
rush  line  is  a  strong  one  and  particularly  where  it  is  stronger 
than  your  own  it  is  certainly  inadvisable.  In  such  a  case  the 
backs  should  hold  themselves  as  reserves  rather  than  as  of  the 
rush  line.  Otherwise,  in  case  an  opponent  clears  your  rush  line, 
a  long  run  is  likely  to  follow. 

In  everything  that  they  do,  whether  on  offense  or  defense,  the 
three  backs  should  combine  in  every  possible  way  with  the 
quarter-back.  The  center  rush,  the  three  backs  and  the  quarter- 
back should  practice  constantly  together  so  as  to  get  the  purely 
mechanical  work  of  their  positions  well  ordered,  and  in  a  con- 
test the  three  backs  should  keep  the  quarter-back  constantly 
informed  of  weak  places  in  the  opposing  defense,  that  he  may 
profit  by  them  when  occasion  demands.  In  a  nutshell,  all  four 
backs  should  strive  for  mental,  moral  and  physical  team  play 
both  on  and  off  the  field. 

BACK-FIELD   WORK. 

In  the  back  field,  the  main  function  of  the  backs  is  the  handling 
of  kicks,  and  it  is  one  of  the  most  trying  functions  of  all  foot  ball. 
To  have  to  catch  a  ball  while  one's  opponents  are  in  many  cases 
standing  within  arm's  reach  like  so  many  wolves  ready  to  take 
advantage  of  the  slightest  slip  up  is  bad  enough,  but  when  these 
conditions  are  augmented  by  the  necessity  of  judging  a  high  kick 
in  a  gale  of  wind,  and  remembering  that  a  kicked  ball  touching 
the  ground  puts  every  one  on-side,  they  become  well-nigh  unbear- 
able except  to  the  coolest,  most  skillful  and  best  drilled  players. 
Such,  however,  is  the  trying  position  in  which  backs  often  find 
themselves  on  thirty  or  forty  separate  occasions  in  a  single  game. 
And  worst  of  all  they  are  severely  censured  where  they  fail  of 
a  clean  record.  A  team  can  never  know  how  much  kicking  it  is 
likely  to  meet  in  any  game  until  the  game  is  on,  and  it  can  never 
know  when  the  winning  or  losing  of  a  game  may  turn  upon  the 
safe  handling  of  a  single  kick.  The  possibilities  of  catastrophes 
are  greater  in  the  back  field  than  in  any  other  branch  of  foot  ball 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  83 

play,  and  so  it  is  imperative  that  only  the  most  reliable  men 
should  represent  an  eleven  there.  The  backs,  then,  cannot  be 
given  too  much  practice  in  catching  kicks  under  every  possible 
condition.  They  should  practice  with  ends  running  down  on 
them,  with  the  wind  against  the  kicker  as  well  as  with  him,  with 
a  wet  and  dry  ball.  Furthermore,  they  should  be  given  an  oppor- 
tunity to  handle  rolling,  bouncing  and  twisting  balls. 

Under  ordinary  circumstances  only  one  back  is  kept  in  the  back 
field,  although  this  year  it  is  probable  that  two  will  be  needed. 
It  is  his  duty  to  handle  all  unexpected  kicks  and  to  tackle  any 
runner  that  may  get  by  the  other  ten  players.  He  must  be  a  sure 
catcher  and  tackier,  and  something  of  a  kicker.  This  back  may 
find  himself  on  some  occasion  in  the  very  trying  position  of 
being  the  only  man  between  his  goal  and  a  fast  opponent.  When 
this  is  the  case  the  back  must,  as  a  general  rule,  depend  upon  his 
own  initiative  for  his  line  of  action.  No  one  else  can  lay  it  out 
for  him.  There  are,  however,  one  or  two  points  which  any  back 
will  do  well  to  keep  in  mind.  It  is  always  a  good  plan  to  try  to 
force  the  runner  to  take  that  direction  that  will  bring  him  nearest 
to  the  side  line,  where  it  may  be  possible  either  to  corner  him  or 
to  force  him  out  of  bounds.  There  is  little  sense  in  undertaking 
to  tackle  a  runner  who  has  the  whole  field  to  manoeuvre  in,  when 
you  can  reduce  the  field  by  two-thirds.  Another  point  to  be  kept 
in  mind  is  that  of  never  running  at  full  speed  at  a  runner  whom 
it  is  your  intention  to  tackle,  especially  when  he  has  an  oppor- 
tunity to  side-step  or  dodge  you.  This  side-stepping  is  the  easiest 
thing  imaginable  where  the  tackier  bears  down  on  his  victim  at 
full  speed.  It  is  frequently  illustrated  when  ends  overrun  a  full- 
back, who  by  a  simple  side-step  eludes  them  and  makes  a  good 
run.  Instead,  the  back  should  run  fast  toward  his  opponent  until 
he  gets  within  fifteen  or  twenty  yards  of  him,  when  he  should 
slow  up  and  get  ready  to  respond  to  dodging,  which  can  only  be 
done  when  the  back  has  full  control  of  his  body.  And  he 
should  exercise  great  care  not  to  be  fooled  by  some  false  motion 
on  the  part  of  the  runner.  This  false  motion  is  usually  given 
with  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  and  can  only  be  detected  by 
keeping  a  close  watch  on  the  hips,  which  will  always  give  away 
the  real  tendency  of  the  body. 

In  case  it  may  at  some  time  seem  advisable  to  utilize  the 
defensive  ability  of  the  goal  tender,  as  we  may  call  him,  on  the 
rush  line,  and  consequently  to  put  another  man  back  there  in 
his  place,  a  sure  catcher  should  be  chosen  even  if  he  is  unable 
to  do  much  at  open  field  tackling.  The  reasoning  here  is  that 
where  a  back  is  given  one  opportunity  to  prevent  a  touchdown 
by  a  decisive  tackle  in  the  open  field — which  is  frequently  missed 


g4  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

by  even  the  best  players,  owing  to  the  tremendous  speed  of  the 
runner — he  is  given  twenty  chances  to  catch  the  ball  where  any 
one  catch,  if  missed,  might  mean  a  touchdown.  Under  these 
circumstances  it  is  of  course  better  to  provide  for  the  common 
play  rather  than  for  the  emergency.  The  goal  tend  should  keep 
a  sharp  lookout  for  trick  plays  and  where  possible  keep  his 
fellow  players  posted  by  calling  out  advice  which  his  distance 
from  the  scrimmage  may  enable  him  to  give. 

The  moment  the  opponents  give  evidence  of  an  intention  to 
kick,  one  or  two  of  the  other  backs  should  at  once  drop  back 
to  reinforce  the  goal  tend.  Care  must  of  course  be  taken  that 
the  evidence  is  genuine  before  they  go  clear  back,  but  once 
they  feel  sure  of  this  point  they  should  run  back  at  full  speed, 
looking  over  their  shoulders  about  every  ten  yards  to  prevent 
the  kick  from  surprising  them,  or  else  to  be  ready  for  a  return 
to  the  line  in  case  of  a  fake.  Backs  frequently  loaf  back  to 
their  position.  This  is  all  wrong;  they  should  be  either  on  the 
line  or  way  back  of  it,  with  as  little  time  as  possible  wasted  in 
getting  into  either  position.  The  distance  of  these  backs  from 
the  rush  line  and  their  relative  positions  in  the  back  field  will 
depend  upon  circumstances.  If  the  kicker  is  a  good  one  and 
has  the  wind  at  his  back  they  should  of  course  play  further 
back  than  if  he  is  a  poor  kicker  and  has  a  stiff  wind  against 
him.  The  thing  to  be  avoided  is  the  danger  of  playing  too 
far  back.  This  is  a  very  common  fault  among  novices,  who 
dread  having  the  ball  kicked  over  their  heads  and  who,  in  order 
to  prevent  such  a  catastrophe,  play  so  far  back  that  it  is  impos- 
sible for  them  to  catch  more  than  three  out  of  five  of  the 
shorter  kicks,  owing  to  the  impossibility  of  getting  under  the 
ball.  It  is  better  policy  to  take  one  chance  in  fifty  of  having  a 
kick  go  over  one's  head  for  the  sake  of  catching  the  great 
majority  of  them  than  it  is  to  prevent  a  kick  over  one's  head 
at  the  expense  of  having  to  handle  them  on  the  bounce,  where 
the  opportunities  for  gaining  ground  after  the  catch  are  nil. 
No  ball  should  be  allowed  to  bounce,  for  it  puts  the  opponents 
all  on-side.  They  should  all  be  caught  on  the  fly,  and  if  balls 
are  bouncing  it  shows  that  the  backs  are  not  covering  the  ground 
in  a  thorough  manner. 

Once  they  are  the  proper  distance  behind  the  line  the  backs 
should  spread  out  in  such  a  way  as  best  to  cover  the  territory  in 
which  the  ball  is  likely  to  fall.  To  this  end  they  should  not 
stand  too  near  each  other  or  too  near  the  side  line.  If  they 
stand  too  near  together  they  will  overlap  much  ground,  and  if 
they  stand  too  near  the  side  line  they  will  enable  themselves  to 
catch  many  balls  which  go  in  touch  and  which  there  is  no  need 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  85 

of  providing  for,  while  at  the  same  time  they  will  be  unable  to 
cover  much  important  ground  within  the  field.  The  backs 
should  play  far  enough  apart  so  that  they  can  concentrate  at  any 
given  spot  in  time  to  be  of  assistance  to  each  other  either  in 
catching  or  in  the  interference.  In  case  a  strong  wind  is  blowing 
at  the  kicker's  back  one  of  the  backs  should  play  a  little  in  rear 
of  the  others  in  order  to  provide  for  a  possible  misjudging  or  for 
fumbles.  Under  ordinary  conditions  one  of  the  backs  should  play 
well  in  front  of  the  others  in  order  to  be  ready  for  short  kicks  or 
other  tricks.  In  case  one  of  the  backs  essays  a  fair  catch  the 
others  should  be  on  the  watch  for  a  fumble.  The  best  way  to  get 
practice  on  these  various  points  is  to  put  two  sets  of  backs,  with 
center,  at  work  kicking  and  catching.  Then  a  competition  may 
be  encouraged  with  result  that  all  the  players  become  interested, 
and  in  the  endeavor  to  win  the  competition  give  each  other  the 
best  practice  possible. 

Whenever  possible  it  is  well  to  have  ends  run  down  under  the 
kicks,  thereby  givhig  the  backs  every  opportunity  to  catch  kicks 
"under  fire."  Continuous  back-field  practice  is  very  exhausting, 
so  that  it  is  well  whenever  much  practice  of  this  kind  is  under- 
taken to  have  alternate  squads  of  players,  thereby  saving  all 
of  them  from  overwork.  Should  the  backs  become  tired  of  the 
practice  and  allow  it  to  become  lackadaisical,  it  should  at  once 
be  discontinued,  as  carelessness  in  back-field  practice  is  worse 
than  none  at  all. 

In  preparing  to  catch  kicks  the  backs  should  make  every 
endeavor  to  get  under  the  ball  in  time  enough  to  enable  them 
to  receive  it  while  they  are  standing  still.  To  do  this  they  must 
be  able  to  "size  up"  a  ball  as  soon  as  it  rises  in  the  air. 

In  running  up  on  a  ball  the  backs  should  also  be  careful  not 
to  overrun  it,  remembering  that  it  is  much  easier  to  run  up  on  a 
ball  than  to  run  back  for  it  in  case  it  is  misjudged.  Furthermore, 
in  case  a  back  who  is  careful  to  keep  the  ball  in  front  of  him 
misjudges  it  and  it  hits  him  in  the  chest,  he  stands  a  much 
better  chance  of  recovering  the  ball  as  it  falls  in  front  of  him 
than  he  would  have  if  he  overran  the  ball  and  it  fell  behind  him. 

While  in  the  act  of  catching  a  back  should  concentrate  his 
entire  attention  on  the  ball,  never  attempting  to  divide  it  with 
the  opposing  ends.  The  plea  that  a  back  often  advances  for 
this  tendency  is  that  he  ^s  afraid  of  a  bad  fall  just  as  he  is 
completing  the  catch,  or  that  he  wants  to  see  where  the  ends 
are,  that  he  may  dodge  them  more  effectively,  etc.,  etc.  These 
excuses  should  all  be  denied  on  the  ground  that  the  possession 
of  the  ball  is  the  thing.  And  in  this  connection  it  is  just  as 
well  to  say  that  in  case  a  back   fumbles   in  the   back  field  he 


86  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBEAET. 

should  fall  on  the  ball  at  once.  This  poiml  should  be  so  drilled 
into  the  players  that  it  is  second  nature  to  diem. 

The  moment  a  back  has  caught  the  ball  he  should  turn  his 
attention  to  his  opponents,  seeking  how  he  can  dodge  them  and 
run  the  kick  back.  In  case  he  catches  the  kick  in  time  to 
decide  from  his  own  observations  in  which  direction  to  run  a 
back  should  experience  little  difficulty  in  getting  off  safely.  But 
when  the  ball  and  the  ends  arrive  almost  simultaneously  the 
situation  is  more  difficult.  In  such  a  position  the  other  backs 
should  assist  by  a  word  or  two.  At  first  the  giving  of  such 
directions  will  end  in  much  confusion,  but  as  the  backs  become 
more  and  more  accustomed  to  each  other  this  difficulty  will 
disappear,  to  be  followed  by  satisfactory  results.  Where  a  back 
is  a  good  dodger  he  can  often  fool  opponents  by  making  a  false 
start  in  one  direction  and  then  following  it  up  with  a  real  start 
in  another.  This  ability  is  natural,  and  no  coaching  can  develop 
it  except  where  the  player  has  in  him  the  crude  qualities. 

One  thing,  however,  every  back  can  be  taught,  and  that  is 
that  he  shall  never  run  back.  Running  back  in  back-field  work 
is  even  more  fatal  than  in  ordinary  scrimmage  play.  Another 
thing  to  be  borne  in  mind  is  that  under  no  circumstances  can  a 
back  use  his  "straight-arm"  more  effectually  than  in  the  broken 
field  running  that  forms  such  a  big  part  of  back-field  work. 
Here  it  is  that  opponents  are  usually  few  and  the  time  com- 
paratively long  for  shifting  the  ball  from  one  hand  to  the  other 
in  order  to  do  this  warding  off. 

With  this  we  may  be  said  to  have  covered,  after  a  general 
fashion,  the  topic  embraced  under  the  main  title,  and  therefore 
to  have  completed  this  article.  One  thing  yet  remains  to  be 
said,  however,  and  that  is  that  no  back  who  wishes  to  get  the 
most  out  of  these  suggestions  can  hope  to  do  so  unless  he  first 
puts  into  himself  the  right  spirit,  and  follows  it  up  with  staunch 
obedience  to  his  training  rules. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


87 


SIGNALS 

BY    ROCKWELL   AND    HOGAN, 
Quarter  and  Tackle  of  Yale  Team  of  1902. 

onsstmoos 

The  first  essential  in  any  system  of  signals  is  simplicity.  An 
intricate  and  complicated  system  always  militates  against  the 
team  using  it ;  the  quarter  is  troubled  in  framing  his  signals  and 
the  speed  which  should  accompany  successful  play  is  impossible. 
The  confusion  and  uncertainty  of  the  quarter  afTects  the  other 
members  of  the  team  ;  they  do  not  jump  into  the  plays  with  the 
dash  and  vim  which  characterize  a  team  confident  of  its  signals 
and  receiving  inspiration  from  the  knowledge  that  the  whole 
team  is  working  on  the  same  play.  It  does  not  follow  because 
your  system  is  simple,  that  your  opponents  will  make  it  out. 
The  chances  are  very  much  against  their  doing  so,  and  while 
they  take  their  attention  from  the  play  to  watch  your  signals 
you  gain  such  advantage  over  them  as  will  enable  you  to  push 
your  plays  so  successfully  as  to  give  them  something  else  to 
think  of  save  your  signals.  Yet  in  spite  of  the  extreme  improb- 
ability of  discovering  your  signals  it  may  happen  that  your 
team  will  be  discouraged  and  its  play  materially  affected  by 
believing  that  your  opponents  are  playing  its  signals.  So,  in  all 
the  systems  given  in  this  article,  provision  is  made  for  a  change, 
which  should  be  made  immediately  in  such  a  case;  a  change 
which  is  in  keeping  with  the  simplicity  of  the  system  and  yet 
sufficient  to  regain  the  confidence  of  your  team. 

In  any  system  of  signaling  there  are  always  two  considera- 
tions: the  quarter,  or  whoever  calls  the  signals,  and  the  rest  of 
the  team.     The  system  should  be  such  as  will  enable  the  quarter 


88  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

to  give  the  plays  quickly  and  accurately.  There  should  be  no 
hesitation  whatever  on  the  quarter's  part.  He  should  practice 
calling  off  the  plays  to  himself  until  he  has  every  one  in  his 
control  and  can  use  any  of  them  when  he  needs  it.  Not  only 
should  there  be  no  hesitation  on  the  part  of  the  quarter,  but 
the  rest  of  the  team  also  should  grasp  the  play  as  soon  as  it  is 
called.  The  play  originates  with  the  quarter  and  so  is  per- 
fectly evident  to  him,  but  it  should  also  be  clear  to  the  team 
just  as  soon  as  the  signal  denoting  it  is  given.  Very  often  you 
will  see  the  quarter  call  the  signal  and  then  wait  till  the  rest  of 
the  team  understands  it  before  receiving  the  ball  from  the 
centre.  There  should  be  no  wait.  The  system  should  be  one 
to  enable  the  whole  team  to  get  the  play  immediately  the  signal 
is  called.  On  the  speed  with  which  the  ball  is  put  into  play 
depends  to  a  considerable  extent  the  success  of  the  offensive 
work  of  the  team  and,  therefore,  it  is  most  essential  that  there 
should  be  no  unnecessary  delay  after  the  signal  is  called.  All 
the  systems  taken  in  this  article  have  those  ends  in  view.  They 
have  all  been  tried  and  found  to  conform  to  the  demands  of  any 
situation. 

For  the  sake  of  clearness  the  different  systems  are  numbered 
as  Code  I,  Code  II,  etc.  In  the  diagrams  the  black  solid  square 
denotes  the  player  taking  the  ball ;  the  heavy,  continuous  line  the 
direction  which  he  takes ;  the  zig-zag  line  shows  how  the  ball 
reached  him  and  the  dotted  lines  the  directions  taken  by  the 
other  players,  save  the  one  carrying  the  ball.  The  dotted  squares 
indicate  changes  in  position  assumed  by  the  players  in  such  a 
play  as  a  wing-shift,  etc. 

To  indicate  the  positions  the  following  abbreviations  have 
been   adopted:     L.    E.,   left   end;    R.    E.,    right    end;    L.   T.    left 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARl.  89 

tackle ;  R.  T.,  right  tackle ;  L.  G.,  left  guard ;  R'.  G.,  right  guard , 
C,  center ;  Q.,  quarter-back ;  L.  H.,  left  half-back ;  R.  H.,  right 
half-back;   R   B.,   full-back. 

For  Code  I  a  letter  system  is  taken,  having  as  a  base  a  word, 
or  combination  of  words,  containing  either  ten  or  eleven  letters, 
in  which  the  same  letter  does  not  occur  twice.  It  may  be 
either  ten  or  eleven,  as  the  center  may  or  may  not  be  denoted 
by  a  letter.  Such  words  as  f-o-r-m-i-d-a-b-l-e,  d-a-n-g-e-r- 
o-u-s-1-y,  i-m-p-o-r-t-a-n-c-e,  or  combinations  like  p-r-i-v-a-t-e- 
b-o-d-y,  c-h-a-r-g-e-d-w-o-r-k,  c-o-n-v-i-c-t-l-a-m-p — any  word  or 
combination  in  which  the  same  letter  does  rot  occur  twice  and 
which  has  ten  or  eleven  letters.  Take  the  combination  H-a-n-o- 
v-e-r — C-i-t-y,  and  beginning  with  the  left  end  give  each  posi- 
tion a  letter. 

CITY 

Q.    L.H.  F.B.  R.H. 

The  letters  H,  A,  N,  V,  E,  R,  stand  for  holes  thus: 

H — Means  end  run  around  your  own  Left  End. 

A — Means  play  through  Left  Tackle,  either  inside  or  outside 

his  position. 
N — Means  play  through  Left  Guard. 
V — Means  play  through  Right  Guard. 
E — Means  play  through  Right  Tackle,  either  inside  or  outside 

his  position. 
R — End  run  around  your  own  Right  End. 


H    ^    N 

OVER 

L.E.    L.T.    L.G. 

C.     R.G.    R.T.    R.E. 

SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


Let  the  first  letter  given  in  the  signal  indicate  the  player  who 
is  to  carry  the  ball  and  the  next  letter  the  hole  or  direction  in 
which  the  ball  goes.  For  example,  let  the  letters  called  in  the 
signal  be:  I,  A.  The  play  indicated  is  the  Left  Half-back 
through  Left  Tackle.  Naturally  the  quarter  would  call  more 
letters  than  those  merely  required  to  denote  the  play,  so  this 
signal  might  run  in  such  a  way  as.  "I — A — B — C — D."  The 
last  three  letters  only  helping  to  prevent  the  signal  from  being 
discovered.  The  following  is  a  diagram  of  the  play: 
R.H. 


RlO 

6h 


Org. 

f 

D 


LE,         L.T.A.M.6.        C 


^ 

u 

R.6. 

R.T. 

R.E 

C^^^J'^^^-r>.^\r\f\J\t\j^rJ 


m 

LH 


a 


-" a 


R.H. 


f:b. 

Fig.  I. 
Your  L.  T.  and  L.  E.  push  the  opposing  R.  T.  (designated  In 
the  diagram  by  a  circle)  back.  Your  L.  H.  follows  straight  be- 
hind your  L.  T.  with  the  Q.,  F.  B.  and  R.  H.  holding  him  on  his 
feet  and  pushing  him  through  the  hole.  The  linemen  charge 
straight  at  their  opponents  with  the  exception  of  the  R.  E., 
who  goes  in  front  of  his  own  line  and  tries  to  get  hold  of  the 
man   with  the  ball  and  pull  him  along. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


Let    the   signal   given   be:     "Y— E— A— R."    The   play   is  the 
R.  H.  through  R.  T.     Fig.  2  shows  the  play. 


-> 


Dlt 


/ 
t 
1 

n 

n 

1    1 

1 

L.E. 

LT 

L.G. 

c  1 

Q  L 

R.6. 

R/.T. 
, -'//•'TV 

H.t 

RH. 


D □-•■ 

Fig.  2. 
Here  your  R.  T.  and  R.  E.  push  the  opposing  L.  T.  back  and 
the  L.   E.   runs  in   front  of  his  own  line,  as  did  the  R.   E.   in 
Fig.   I,  and  pulls  the  man  with  the  ball.     For  the  duty  of  the 
other  men  see  the  explanation  after  Fig.  i. 


92 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


Let    the    signal    given    be:     "T — V — I — S — T."     The    play    is 
your  F.  B.  through  your  R.  G.     Fig.  3  shows  this  play. 


L£. 


-^U: 


Q 

0 

n 

D 

g 

fa 

D 

L.T. 

LG. 

c| 

;  RG. 

ax 

R,H 


Here  your  R,  G.  with  the  assistance  of  R.  T.  pushes  the 
opposing  L.  G,  back.  The  F.  B.  get  the  ball  from  Q.,  who 
must  be  careful  to  get  out  of  his  way,  and  follows  straight 
behind  the  R.  G.  Your  R.  H.  and  L.  H.  should  keep  him  on 
his  feet  after  he  has  met  opposition  and  the  two  ends,  both  of 
whom  should  have  come  around  in  front  of  their  own  line, 
ought  to  pull  him  through  the  grasp  of  opposing  tacklers.  All 
the  linemen  should  push  their  opponents  back  and  away  from 
the  man  with  the  ball. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


Suppose  the  signal  Is  :     "T — N — O — K — B."     The  play  is  the 
F.  B.  through  L.  G.,  as  shown  in  Fig.  4, 


^il- 

0 

^   3 

n    6 

L.E.           L.T.           L.G.        ; 

i  |C.        R.6. 

RT           R.E. 

/ 
/ 

/ 

I]o- 

a 

L.H., 


f:0. 


"D 

R.H. 


Fig.  4. 

This  play  is  exactly  similar  to  that  shown  in  Fig.  3  save  that 
the  L.  G.  and  L.  T.  are  the  men  who  make  hole  by  pushing  the 
opposing  R.  G.  out  of  the  way. 


94 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


Suppose  the  signal  called  is  :     "I — E — D — C — B."     The  play  is 
the  L.  H.  through  R.   T.,  a  cross-huck.     Fig.  5  shows  the  play. 


D 

L£. 


u 

LT. 


L.H. 


Q.. 

F.B. 
Fig.  5. 


□r-^-  ...""" 


In  this  play  your  R.  T.  and  R.  E.  get  the  opposing  tackle  out 
of  the  way ;  the  R.  H.  goes  straight  into  the  hole,  the  L.  H.  car- 
rying the  ball  next;  then  the  Q.  and  L.  T.,  who  comes  around 
into  the  play  from  his  position  in  the  line ;  the  L.  E.  is  the  last 
man  to  follow  the  play — he  makes  it  safe,  watches  for  fumbtes; 
the  F.  B.  runs  straight  out  from  his  position  and  keeps  the 
opposing  L.  E.  from  getting  ihe  play. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


95 


Let  the  signal  be:  "Y— A— R— D— S."  This  is  your  R.  H. 
through  L.  T,  The  L.  T.  and  L.  E.  make  the  hole ;  R.  T.  and  R. 
E.  follow  around  into  the  play.  Fig.  6  shows  this  play,  which 
is  the  same  as  that  in  Fig.  5,  only  on  the  opposite  side  of  your 
line. 


o 


L.E 


K 


D  ,n 


□ 

R/E 


Let  the  signal  be:     "Y— H— A— B— K."    This  is  your  R.  H 
around  your  L.  E.,  as  shown  in  Fig.  7. 


96 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


Vi 

•  .v 

<L) 

a> 

ta^ 

U 

(U 

^ 

-O 

oS 

<u 

o 

a> 

C 

'tr> 

'Ck 

^ 

IT 

W 

^ 

(U 

J-1 

^ 

£ 

fc 

<u 
C 

IS 

O 

03 

<u 

o 

(U 

^ 

M5 

c 

ji: 

^ 

•^ 

i^ 

o 

-" 

"" 

t-c 

O 

§ 

t- 
^ 

bib 

U5 

>. 

'Oi 

r 

E 

O 

iS 

tn 

cc 

'a 

C 

C 

C/) 

.bf) 

O 

a> 

e^' 

<u 

dJ 

rC 

^ 

s 

00 

^     bo 

a 

I 


SPALDING'S     ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


97 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


n 


r-D^ 


P 


□ 


o 

to 

V 

W5 

1 

en 

c 

CT5 

< 

C8 

t^ 

__, 

>. 

«+-! 

en 

ti 

'5 

^ 

H 

,^ 

^S 

^ 

^ 

<u 

c 

to 

•0 
a 

B 

pi 

u 

0 

a, 

O 

t-l 

I 

a. 
0 

1 

bfl 

rt 

XI 

bo 

15 

bo 

1 

en 

1 

.5 

1 

5 

CO 

a 

<U 

'5 
0 

"o 

S 
0 

u 

03 

J3 

0 

w 

1 

<u 

4:: 

• 

'a 

pd 

bO 

-o 

0 

H-I 

15 

c 

bo 

0 

0 

.5 

G 

. 

04 

Ji; 

biS 

a, 

> 

On 

0 

_^ 

a, 

O, 

o 

<u 

0 

0 

0 

OJ 

J2 

<u 

c« 

fc 

.^ 

2 

'O 

bo 

c 

<L> 

3 
0 

1 

X 

> 

(/) 

to 

t3 

a> 

OJ 

H 

^ 

m 

2 
0 

00 

rt 

a 

rt 

erf* 

H 

g 

en 

> 
03 

C 

3 

OS 

OJ 

aj 

0 

en 

u< 

<u 

.S 

^ 

u 

bo 

0 

s 

0 

H 

03 

ol 

3 

a; 
rt 

J 

xj 

i 

OS 

15 

1 

Q4 

en 
03 

C 

bo 

c 

t-H 

<u 

S 

0 

a 

j:: 

^ 

J 

S 

a 

£ 

SPALDING'S     ATHLETIC     LIBRARY, 


.22 

.a 

'u 

X 

iB 

^ 

s 

'E 

w 

.2 

•a 

3 

H 

£ 

J 

W3 

^ 

^ 

1 

t-H 

ffi 

1 

<U 

1 

c 

O 

■-^ 

1 

<u 

4 

^ 

«+^ 

< 

o 

•* 

1) 

-o 

tlJ 


o 


T) 

V 

JS 

1 

^ 

^ 

j2 

H 

c 

p:i 

c 

6p 

o 

o 

u 

cf; 

^ 

bb 

H 

E 

J 

G 

(U 

C 

^ 

o 

I- 

^ 

6 

Crt 

'rt 

J2 

bis 

C 

be 

•5 

E 

•^ 

(f) 

c 

a 

(L» 

j:; 

(U 

c 

H 

s 

*rt 

p^  I 


LOf  c. 


100  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

In  Code  I  the  signal  for  a  kick  could  be  any  letter  not  in  the 
combination  you  adopt  as  your  key.  Suppose  the  letter  B  de- 
notes a  kick.  Then  the  full  signal  for  the  F.  B.  to  kick  the 
ball  would  be:  "T— B— C— A— O."  In  Fig.  ii  is  seen  the 
formation   now   commonly   adopted   for   a   kick. 

^  A 


I 


D 

L.T. 


n 

L.G. 


n 

R.G. 


n 

R.T. 


R.E 


a 

n 

1 

Q 

L.H. 

R.H. 

1 

1 

F^B. 
Fig.  II. 

The  two  ends  get  \^  ell  outside  their  Tackles  and  as  soon  as 
the  ball  is  snapped,  go  straight  down  the  field.  The  L.  T.  jostles 
the  opposing  Tackle  and  then  goes  down.  The  other  linemen 
should  hold  their  opponents  long  enough  to  ensure  the  F.  B.'s 
having  time  to  get  the  kick  off  in  safety.  The  Q.,  L.  H.  and  R. 
H.,  leaning  forward  on  their  hands,  in  the  positions  shown  in 
Fig.  II,  protect  the  F.  B.  from  anyone  who  may  succeed  in 
breaking  through  the  line. 

The  simple  plays  have  now  been  given  in  Code  I.     These  are 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  lOi 

the  plays  which  every  team  must  be  absolute  master  of.  They 
may  be  played  in  every  part  o£  the  field  and  on  their  success 
depends  to  a  great  extent  the  success  of  your  team. 

The  following  diagrams  illustrate  plays  intended  to  puzzle 
your  opponents  and  which  they  may  not  be  prepared  to  meiet. 
However,  they  should  not  be  practiced  until  your  team  has 
mastered  the  simple  plays.  Too  often  will  a  team  depend  for 
success  on  tricks  and  fancy  maneuvers,  neglecting  the  steady, 
straight  foot  ball  that  is  the  hardest  to  withstand  when  played 
properly,  only  to  be  doomed  to  disappointment  as  a  result. 


A  SIGNAL  FOR  A  WING  SHIFT 

(using  code  l) 

The  Quarter  may  call  out  "Formation  A,"  if  the  play  is  to  go 
on  the  left  of  centre ;  "Formation  B,''  if  the  play  is  to  go  on 
the  right.  (See  Fig.  12.)  Then,  either  the  regular  sigiial  for 
an  end  run  or  a  signal  for  a  quick  drive  into  line  following  a 
feint  at  an  end  run.     (Fig.  13.) 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIKRARY. 


<-. 


^O       N"^ 

N"  I-,  \ 

\ 
\ 
\ 
\ 

^■-x  V 

I 
t 
t 

\ 

-^-*. 


^'C 


I 


D 


D 


01 

d 


l!  o 


ns 


D:^;! 


•-■I 


^  ^ 


3 


«    Si 
c    o 


<u 


y    J3     bo 

I     ^  -^ 


(U 


<n 


in 


CA 


m 


^    ^  a 
J    ^  g 

pq      -^       O 


<U 


CO  tfl  _ 

^  'O  .-;:: 

s  I  * 

i>  til  +j 


^   -5    K 
bO    *-"       i 


^     S 


t 


U)   J 


"'     bo 


C      j3 


flJ     "I^^     »-N 


il 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


103 


Do"' 


T. 

© 

^ 

1^ 

^ 

o 

•^        t 

M    ^ 

u 

1 

rt 

t,      ' 

C/2 

7^  o 

2    1 

ffi 

<J       1 

H-i 

en 

'O 

a     1 

ffi 

"   J 

pi 

^-  ^ 

<u 

*«    c 

^ 

J2       O 

H 

II 

2* 

^.1 

bb 

o<    :: 

1   \ 

£ 

•     'H 

,    \ 

CO 

bfi  ^ 

1    « 

.s 

E     *i 

I'D 

1 

c     bfi 

as 

>  1 

T3 

r  "cS 

en 

:3 

ffi     g, 

U) 

J     " 

1  ■ 

c 
*> 

a 

en 

a  O 

•in 

a 

2    Ci^" 

''\ 

in 

3 

1    ^ 

IJ 

J 

U3 

1^ 

o 

>> 

a  ^ 

J3 

..  ^ 

en 

15 

■^  s 

H 

4J       > 

•£  ••5 

104 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


The  team  lines  up  in  regular  formation  as  in  Fig.  i.  The  sig- 
nal given,  the  line  sidestep  to  the  right  two  positions,  as  in  figure; 
the  L.T,  then  becomes  centre,  Q.  and  L.H.  keep  their  position 
while  the  F.B.  and  R.G.  alter  position  with  the  line  men.  Now,  we 
have  seven  men  on  our  right  wing,  as  opposed  to  four  of  our 
opponents.    The  play  can  be  a  cross  buck,  as  in  Fig.  5,  or  an  end 


L.fi 

o 

o    O    O    O    O    J 

a  n  D  D  r 

U  W  Lfi.  C 


o 

71 


RT.       :  RE- 


R.H. 

L.H. 

Fig.  14— Wing  Shift.    2nd  Method. 

run,  as  in  Fig.  8.  Whatever  the  play  used  it  is  absclutely  essen- 
tial that  the  play  start  the  instant  the  shift  is  made.  To  perfect 
this  play,  both  tackles  should  be  drilled  in  passing  the  ball  to  the 
quarter.  Thus,  the  shift  can  be  ordered  either  to  the  right  or 
left,  as  the  case  may  warrant.  There  should  be  daily  practice  by 
the  entire  line  in  this  quick  change  of  positions,  so  that  when 
the  signal  is  called  the  play  may  be  executed  like  a  flash. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

FAKE  KICK. 


105 


J 

a 

^ 

'H 

jS 

?. 

•^ 

QJ 

'u 

js 

V 

_bO 

oJ 

^ 

u 

o 

C 

a; 

^ 

^ 

u 

o 

u 

O 

.!2 

<u 

Ch 

IS 

.5 

^ 

-o 

<u 

<U 

.fl 

,S 

O 

p 

o 

n 

<u 

o 

u 

'T3 

»+H 

■^ 

_o 

3 

G 

c 
o 

Ui 

^ 

(L> 

<i> 

u 

g) 

^ 

s 

c 

>» 

o 

<u 

OJ 

V- 

f-; 

s 

•+-1 

-^ 

>^ 

"rt 

c 

r5 

rO 

'0^ 

V] 

« 

<U 

pq 

^ 

, 

H 

*5 

fH 

cat  \  ■ 


tyb 

^ 

W 

v 

1 

OS 

S 

1 

03 

Ui 

■^ 

-o 

bo 

c 

2 

d 

OS 

'3 

.G 

s 

s 

05 

C 

O 

v^ 

> 

o 

•n 

■^ 

«+-. 

^ 

."« 

en 

rt 

o5 

•^ 

-o 

^ 

'3 

o 

a 

rt 

•-^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^^ 

& 

c 

^ 

a 

<u 

lU 

,Q 

Td 

j: 

J3 

JC 

O 

.4_> 

bo 

^ 

cS 

"s 

W 

ffi 

rt 

fc 

h4 

U) 

(U 

!U 

m 

.G 

4:: 

« 

H 

-^ 

.j;; 

P 

H 

- 

0 

^Q 

\ 

-I  cc 

nt; 


106 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


FOUR-MEN   FORMATION 
PLAYS 

r**i 

nnsnniiiiosi 

The  following  eight  plays  are  the  so-called  "Four-men  forma- 
tion plays.''  In  them  one  of  the  line  men  is  called  back  either  to 
run  with  the  ball  or  assist  in  the  interference.  In  the  following 
plays  it  is  the  L.T.  who  is  brought  back  and  placed  directly  be- 
hind R.T.     It  will  be  noticed  that  the   R.H.   takes   his  position 


LE.        LG.        C.         R.G.      R.T.  y^  RE. 

D  D  n  D  ETD 


L.T. 

o 


\ 


□a. 


L.T. 


F.a 

Fig.  i6. 

always  "outside  the  position  occupied  by  the  man  on  the  end 
of  the  liae"  to  conform  with  the  requirements  of  the  1904  rules. 
This  play  is  the  simple  end  run.  The  L.H.  carries  the  ball 
around  your  own  right  end.  R.H.  and  F.B.  block  the  opposing 
end.  Q.B.  after  he  has  passed  the  ball  to  L.H.  and  L.T.  form 
interference  for  the  runner. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


107 


This  play  is  a  "tandem"  on  right  tackle.    The  L.T.  carries  the 
ball  and  runs  straight  at  his  own  R.T.     The  Q.,  L.H.,  F.B.  and 


LL  L.G. 


X, 


R.6. 

D 


D 


LT.l 

J" 

1 
1 

L.H. 

1 

F.B. 

Fig.  17. 


RH 


R.H.  all  follow,  helping  L.T.  to  keep  his  feet  and  pushing  him 
through  the  line.  This  play  should  be  always  good  for  a  gain  of 
two  yards  when  used  alternately  with  play  in  Fig.  18. 


108 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


This  play  is  the  same  as  in  Fig.  17,  except  that  the  F.B.  carries 
the  ball.  The  F.B.  keeps  running  close  behind  the  L.T.,  ready 
to  take  advantage  of  the  first  opening.  A  good  full-back  often- 
times adds  two  or  three  yards  by  a  quick  shift  or  dive  after  the 


O 

R.G.  RJ.y^        R.E. 

nan 


n 

R.H. 


Fig.  18. 


play  appears  stopped.  A  strap  sewed  on  the  jacket  of  L.T.  or 
suitably  fastened  on  the  back  of  his  belt  may  be  of  help  to  F.B., 
who  when  tackled  can  grasp  this  strap  and  be  sometimes  pulled 
clear  of  tacklers.  The  R.H.  protects  F.B.  from  opposing  end; 
L.H.  and  Q.  push  as  in  play  in  Fig.  17. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


109 


L.E. 

D 


L.G. 

D 


r^  Vn 

\r.t 

1    1 

D 


a 

L.H. 


Fig.  19. 


LX 


d 

F.B. 


■g 


In  this  play  the  L.T.  lakes  the  ball  and  runs  directly  on  R.G. 
R.G.  pushes  his  man  to  the  right  and  R.T.  helps  him.  Q.,  L.H., 
F.B.,  and  R.H.  push  as  in  play  in  Fig.  17. 


110  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

This  play  is  the  delayed  pass  to  L.H.  The  Q.  pretends  to  pass 
to  L.T.  (who,  of  course,  feigns  to  receive  it),  then  turns,  hiding 
it  the  while,  and  passes  to  L.H.,  who  runs  directly  outside  R.T. 
F.B.,  L.T.,  and  R.H.  run  as  if  the  play  were  between  center  and 
R.G.  and  must  push  and  fight  just  as  hard  as  if  they  were  carry- 
ing the  ball.  The  L.T.  must  be  careful  not  to  knock  the  ball 
from  the  Q's  hands.  He  should  reach  out  over  the  ball  and 
cover  the  ball  with  his  arms  while  the  fake  pass  is  being  made 


LE. 

D 


L.G. 

D 


Lii. 


and  then  double  up  as  if  he  had  the  ball  and  shoot  into  the  line. 
The  Q.  can  materially  aid  the  deception  by  turning  his  back  to 
opponents  after  he  has  made  the  fake  pass  to  L.T.  He  should 
hold  the  ball  a  moment  and  then  pass  to  L.H.  L.H.  must  give  Q. 
time  to  make  his  fake  pass  and  then  to  hold  ball  a  moment.  L.H. 
runs  direct  on  R.T.  R.T.  and  R.E.  try  to  coax  their  opposing 
tackle  through  on  the  outside.  This  play  to  be  most  effective 
should  be  used  sparingly  and  always  on  a  first  or  second  down. 
Try  it  after  the  play  in  Fig.  19  has  been  used  two  or  three  times. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


Ill 


This  is  the  quarter-back  run  around  the  right  end.    The  R.H. 
and  F.B.  block  the  opposing  end.  L.T.  and  L.H.  make  the  inter- 


sD 


ference,  as  in   Fig.    i6.     Q.   receives  ball   from  center   and   runs 
wide.    This  should  be  a  very  good  play  with  a  fast  quarter. 


112 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


a 


so 


m 


d 


.SA^^ 


V     O 


a 


0 


.s* 

h4 

— 1 

tn 

-1 

<v 

<1) 

<u 

j:^ 

J2 

H 

-o 

C 

^ 

rt 

iL> 

u 

03 

H 

0$   a  aj 

o  r  — 

O     >>    biO 
be    rt     cu 

o  iH 

TO 


j_^      WM  l-H      c^      v^      rt 


J5 


§  ate g " 

'-to  ^     ^ 

.„.   jj     ^       Oh      rt 


^  •-  ■§  f  ^  § 

•—I     rt     (-1 


"I 


°  -s  "^  -B.  a  i 


"^  .^  -2  -  -i   o 


^0-5 


3     (U 
O   ^ 


42 

3 

"5 

Ul 

_-i-> 

(-1 
1/1 

tfl 

-i-> 

;-> 

OJ 

C 
o 

O 

J5 
2 

^3 
C 
n3 

tH 

(U 

t/5 

t/5 

"3 

flj 

a 
c 

"'5 

O 

-d 

1-1 

•S 

s 

13 

d 

bfi 
.S 

c/5 

o 

to 

(U 

CD 

Oh 

03 
C 

15 

M-l 

'E, 

3 

o 

be. 

CAl 

^ 

0 

o 

rt 

o 

< 

.'5 

"TS 

Cu 

<; 

d 

rt 

0 

^ 

1 

03 

K 

to 
U2 

Ic 

P^' 

3 

--;     a     03     i,     „, 

'rt     2     .  „    S     ?:^  C 
-"     Ph    3     rt 

S  «.  5 

.;=■§"  -a  § 

be  ^      (y      U      <1>  t>, 

.y   o  i!  C^  '^  c 

-Jj    '^      03  <L>  •- 

5    IS  ^  Oh 

X   ^    P    be^  (y 

W5    c    o    c    be  p 

•  '"    >^  "c  'S  5 


m  ^  o  §  ^ 


"^  **-  ^    be  'S^ 

.       O     ' — !       ttJ 


^ 


^  V. 


^'  1  ^  -  I  I 

C-H  QJ  nd  C  1^  03 

ti  ^  "^  :::  "^  £ 

9  S  S  ^  g  ii 


c  -5   ^ 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


113 


rt  «  c  i^  4^^  ^  -  „,  --. 

5xJ  =3  (u  iS  o  t)     -^  c-o 

^^     i^     V,  ^  •>  '^ 


V        (^        ■,        -4^ 


^ '  .  ii   3^  OJ  ^  |:H  ^j 


j:  vi/x.  -^  ii  X      CT*^  o  - 


'•-  c  t:  5  ,; 


tJ3 


"        -^    IJ    S 


-^^        US 


^  '^'Z  Z*^  "^Zl  ^  '^^  ^  u 


o  ^ 
^  'to 


c  p: 


a!       .S 


>   ^3 


^oo 


to  <u  S  O 

'^         V   ^    O    Q.  i)   C    O   c3 

f(3  _C  ^*  •■- 


H"aiH  .-ssgo-a 


2 
c  o  c  >. 


114 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


\^ 


.D^ 


O 


A' 


c3      O 

F.  B. 

turn, 
nter- 

-o 

cn 

•— '        cfl 

.     ._       qj 

^    ^    j:: 

^       03 

IJ     ^      en 

"S       ^ 

g     TO     (u 

4_l 

a  £  i^ 

■"        rO 

§•  a  6 

^1 

c   .  •   '^ 

<LI        O 

5   H    c 

~        " 

£          "^ 

■"   ^  i-i 

3       '^ 

o     5 

1-    If 

H     ^ 

8  ffi  d^ 

t/: 

03     '^ 

fc«'  w  ^ 

;±3  H 

CS 

^  i-S    i; 

E  .J 

o 

^  -    1 - 

1^ 

-H   c    a  -o 

It  ^ 

o  -^    o  3 

a  3 

-      bfl     en      O 

-H  ^ 

•=  .s  -^  ^ 

G      en 

03       <U 

-a    p    o   ^ 

^        en 

^    ^      i    •- 

-2    o 

"    ^*     S    ^ 

'S     bfl    3    ^ 

a    c    *-> 

t;    a.  X  "^ 

<:- 

s  ° ;-  «■ 

w 

^      C      ^      V- 

ct 

o      •    o 

^ 

O           bfi  ^ 

O 

-^     '^    ^     ^ 

^     ^    C     ^ 

b/} 

.    ^    —     <u 

E 

HH     ^      en      ^ 

y  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  115 

If  the  Q.  at  any  time  thinks  it  desirable  to  change  the  manner 
of  calling  the  signals,  he  may  readily  do  so  by  having  the  signal 
start  with  the  second,  the  third  or  the  fourth  letter,  or  by  not 
having  the  signal  start  till  he  has  called  some  letter  agreed  on 
that  is  not  in  the  key  and  is  not  used  in  the  plays. 

CODE  II. 
A  Combination  of  Letters  and  Numbers. 

Let  the  F.  be  the  hole  between  guard  ind  center;  H.,  the  hole 
between  tackle  and  guard;  K.,  the  hole  just  outside  tackle;  B., 
end  run. 

As  each  letter  taken  separately  stands  for  the  two  holes,  i.  e., 
F.  would  mean  either  the  hole  between  R.G.  and  C.  or  L.G.  and 
C,  so  some  method  must  be  adopted  to  signify  which  hole  is 
meant.  Now,  if  the  signal  starts  with  an  odd  number,  the  hole 
on  the  left  side  of  center  is  meant ;  if  it  starts  with  an  even  num- 
ber, the  hole  on  the  right  side  is  to  be  the  outlet  for  the  play. 
For  example,  the  signal  ''3 — B,"  etc.,  means  and  end  run  around 
your  own  left  end;  and  "6 — B,"  etc.,  means  an  end  run  around 
number  to  the  training  table  early  in  the  season,  but  make  it 
your  own  right  end.  Therefore  "3 — B,"  etc.,  will  always  mean 
an  end  run  around  your  own  left  end  and  the  right  half-back  will 
carry  the  ball.  So  the  completed  signal  will  be :  "3 — B— 4 — M." 
The  number  4  and  the  letter  M  mean  nothing.  The  complete 
signal  for  the  left  half-back  to  carry  the  ball  around  your  own 
right  end  would  be:  "4— B— 11— X."  Since  the  signal  starts 
with  an  even  number  it  shows  that  the  play  is  to  go  on  the  right 
side  of  center  and  the  letter  B  signifies  that  the  play  is  an  end 
run. 

This  code  contains  but  the  simple  ordinary  plays  used  by  every 
team  during  the  first  weeks  of  practice.  There  are  ten  plays  in 
all,  not,  however,  including  the  kick,  and  are  as  follows: 

L.H.  run  around  R.E 4 — ^ 

R'.H.  run  around  L.E 3 — B 

L.H.  dive  through  L.G.  and  L.T 7 — H 

R.H.  dive  through  R.G.  and  R.T 12— H 

L.H.    cross-buck    just    outside    R.T 14 — K 


116  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    l^IBRARY. 

R.H.    cross-buck    just    outside    R.T 7 — K 

F.B.    dive  through   R.G.   and   C 6 — F 

F.B,    dive   through   L.G.    and    C g — F 

L.T.   run  just  outside   R.T 2—6 — K 

R.T.   run  just  outside  R.T 3 — n — K 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  L.H.,  L.T.,  R.H.  and  R.T.  carry 
the  ball  through  the  same  hole  (K).  Whenever  the  L.T.  is  to 
carry  it  the  signal  will  start  with  two  even  numbers  and  when- 
ever the  R.T.  carries  the  ball,  with  two  odd  numbers.     Thus: 

Signal:     4— 8— K— 5— Y.     (See  Fig.   10.) 

Signal:     2 — K — 9— B.     (See  Fig.  5.) 

Signal:     3— 7— K— 4— R.     (See  Fig.  9.) 

Signal:     9 — K — 2 — M.     (See  Fig.  6.) 

Signal:    4— B— 11— X.     (See  Fig.  8.) 

The  absence  of  letters  from  signal  might  indicate  a  kick;  thus: 
4—6 — 7— .11.     (See  Fig.  11.) 

CODE  III. 

A    SYSTEM    OF    NUMBERS    ILLUSTRATED. 

In  this  system  it  will  be  seen  that  the  even  numbers  are  plays 
on  the  right  of  center  and  the  odd  numbers  are  plays  on  the  left. 

4.  L.G through    R.G. 

5.  R.G through    L.G. 

6.  L.T through    R.T. 

7.  R.T through    L.T. 

8.  L.H around R.E. 

9.  R.H around    L.E. 

10.  L.H cross-buck  through   R.T. 

11.  R.H cross-buck  through    L.T. 

12.  R.H straight  through    R.T. 

13-  LH straight   through    L.T. 

14-  F.B straight    through    R.C. 

15-  F.B straight  through L.C. 

16.  L.E. .  . ; run   around    R.E. 

17-  RE run   around    L.E, 

Kick:  any  number  over  300. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  117 

Now,  let  the  second  number  given  be  the  key  number,  the 
number  which  represents  the  play.    For  instance: 

Signal:    6 — 8 — g — 27 — 4  (See  Fig.  8.) 

Signal:  5 — 12 — 21 — 7    (See  Fig.  2.) 

Signal:     8 — 13—42—9.     (See  Fig.  i.) 

Signal:     5—15—8—2.     (See  Fig.  4.) 

Signal:     6 — 11 — 43 — 8.   (See  Fig.  6.) 

Signal:     357—952.     (See  Fig.  11.) 

Etc.,  etc. 

In  the  last  two  codes  the  Quarter  may  readily  change  the  key 
number  at  any  time  and  so  be  certain  that  his  signals  are  un- 
known to  his  opponents. 

A  SEQUENCE  OF  PLAYS 

It  frequently  happens  that  a  leam,  especially  a  school  team, 
will  have  one  man  who  has  clearly  outplayed  every  opponent  he 
has  faced  and  upon  whom  the  quarter  may  depend  when  there  is 
a  distance  that  must  be  gained.  Under  such  conditions  a  team 
should  have  a  sequence  of  plays,  i.  c.,  three  or  more  plays  pre- 
viously committed  to  memory,  to  be  executed  in  quick  succession 
without  a  signal.  Assuming  that  the  tackle  is  the  steady  and 
reliable  man,  then,  select  three  or  more  plays  through  his  position 
and  constantly  practice  them  as  a  series  without  any  intermis- 
sion. 

A  sequence  of  five  plays  illustrated : 

In  Code  III. — The  second  number  the  key: 

6— (i2)-28-4.     (Fig.  2.) 

5— (  6)— 21— 9.     (Fig.  10.) 

2— (10)— 7— 5.     (Fig.  5.) 

7— (10)— 42— 8.     (Fig.  5) 

8— (11)— 29— 6.     (Fig.  6.) 

If  the  first  four  plays  are  successful  the  opponents  will  nat- 
urally shift  over,  to  try  and  "brace  up"  the  weak  spot,  and  the 
last  play  is  intended  to  surprise  them  and  is,  therefore,  sent  on 
the  opposite   (left)   side  of  the  line. 


jjg  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

WHEN  TO  USE  THE  SEQUENCE 

The  best  time  to  employ  the  sequence  is  in  the  opponent's  terri- 
tory about  twenty-five  yards  from  the  goal,  when  quickness  and 
speed  of  plays  used  is  so  essential  to  success.  Then,  too,  it  is 
highly  probable  that  the  "cheering"  makes  it  hard  to  hear  the 
signals. 

There  are  various  ways  to  signal  the  sequences,  but  a  simple 
and  effective  way  is  to  have  the  quarter  make  some  such  remark 
as  this :  "There's  only  twenty  yards  to  go,  fellows ;  stay  together 
now!"  This  would  mean  that  the  next  signal  was  the  first  of  the 
sequence  and  that  it  would  be  played  without  any  more  direction 
from  the  quarter-back. 

Too  much  emphasis  cannot  be  laid  on  how  essential  to  your 
team's  success  is  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  signals.  Every 
player  should  know  just  what  he  is  to  do  in  each  play;  the  very 
instant  the  signal  is  given,  he  should  recognize  the  play  and  de- 
termine to  do  what  is  expected  of  him.  The  players,  apart  from 
the  general  practice,  should  repeat  the  signals  to  themselves  and 
get  familiar  with  their  individual  duties  in  each  play.  Confidence 
is  almost  essential  to  success  in  offensive  work,  and  a  team  can 
have  but  little  confidence  in  its  ability  to  advance  the  b^ll  till 
every  one  has  thoroughly  mastered  the  signals. 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 


119 


TRAINING  FOR  FOOT  BALL 

BV    MICHAEL    MURTHY. 

ssiistiiiiias 

S 

The  days  of  the  extremes  of  training,  both  in  foot  ball  and 
other  sports  have,  at  any  rate  for  the  time  being,  gone  by.  The 
old-fashioned  notion  that  men  must  be  deprived  of  everything 
they  wanted  for  their  comfort  and  go  through  a  period  of  actual 
physical  suffering  has  been  exploded.  Young  men,  and  partic- 
ularly college  men,  do  not  need  the  severe  regimen  adopted  in 
the  old  days,  when  training  was  confined  only  to  a  certain  class 
and  that  class  one  indulging  in  all  sorts  of  dissipation  between 
times.  For  this  reason  treatises  on  training  can  be  far  mor? 
brief  than  in  the  times  when  the  exact  percentage  of  food  stuffs 
was  figured  out  to  a  nicety.  Moreover,  foot  ball  is  one  of  those 
fortunate  sports  which  comes  at  a  season  of  the  year  when  the 
weather,  except  in  the  very  early  part  of  it,  is  not  exceedingly 
hot,  but  rather  bracing,  and  unless  there  is  something  radically 
wrong  with  the  man,  as  a  rule,  during  the  foot  ball  season,  his 
appetite  should  in  the  main  improve. 

It  is  really  the  nervous  tension  which  has  come  to  be  great 
and  it  is  to  the  relief  of  that  nervous  tension  that  many  of  the 
best  friends  of  the  game  are  looking  in  hopes  that  alterations 
in  the  rules  may  improve  this  condition. 

The  great  majority  of  the  players  are  not  affected  by  this,  but 
the  captain,  coach  and  quarter-back  usually  pass  through  periods 
where  the  worry  is  quite  extreme,  and  while  it  makes  little 
difference  to  the  coach  it  does  affect  the  captain  and  quarter- 
back very  materially  and  with  these  men,  the  greatest  problem 
of  the  training  season  is  to  see  that  they  pay  less  rather  than 
more  attention  to  the  sport  and  get  some  relaxation  at  periods. 

The  general  physical  condition  of  the  men  is  in  these  days 
looked  after  both  by  the  trainer  and  by  competent  surgeons,  so 
far  as  injuries  are  concerned. 


120  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY'. 

The  problem  of  how  much  work  a  man  should  do  and  when 
he  should  work  is  one  of  general  consultation  between  coach, 
trainer  and  captain — the  trainer's  opinion  being  in  the  main 
accepted  as  final — and  as  a  rule  this  trio  make  satisfactory  de- 
cisions. Sometimes  a  man  is  found  who  is  able  to  deceive  all 
three  as  to  his  condition,  but  not  often,  and,  moreover,  such  men 
are  usually  men  whose  personal  idiosyncrasies  are  known. 

One  of  the  most  difficult  points  in  training  a  foot  ball  team  is 
to  keep  them  steadily  progressing  and  not  have  a  slump  at  some 
disastrous  period  during  the  season.  Men  dififer  so  greatly  in- 
dividually that  the  accepted  method  of  working  the  men  now- 
adays  is  to  watch  these  peculiarities  and  not  try  to  judge  all 
men  by  the  same  rule,  but  to  lay  off  first  one  and  then  another 
as  occasion  demands,  giving  them  all  an  opportunity  for  suffi- 
cient practice,  but  forcing  no  man  to  work  too  long. 

It  takes  a  good  deal  of  time  to  teach  a  man  modern  foot  ball 
and  he  has  to  go  through  a  certain  period  of  steady  work  before 
he  combines  the  necessary  knowledge  with  the  skill ;  hence  an 
especial  reason  for  consistency  in  carrying  out  training  develop- 
ment. Foot  ball  men  all  need  quickness  and  the  w^ork  should  be 
devoted  to  short  periods  of  snappy  play  rather  than  long  periods 
which  get  the  man  into  the  bad  habit  of  playing  slowly  because 
he  is  tired. 

A  foot  ball  player  beyond  all  else  needs  to  have  a  sort  of 
superfluous  energy  to  draw  upon  at  the  time  of  his  match  and 
to  exhaust  this  is  to  make  a  very  serious  mistake.  The  men 
should,  therefore,  be  very  carefully  watched  in  order  to  see  that 
the  work  is  not  at  the  expense  of  this  energy,  which  must  be 
called  upon  at  a  critical  time.  No  man  should  find  himself  in 
a  game  without  a  feeling  that  he  would  at  least  like  to  make  a 
touchdown  whether  it  is  possible  or  not,  and  the  making  of  touch- 
downs is  practically  impossible  if  the  man's  physical  and  mental 
condition  is  such  as  to  leave  him  without  desire  to  do  so. 

The  first  problem  in  the  season  that  faces  captain,  coaches  and 
trainers  is  that  of  making  selection  from  a  great  mass  of  mate- 
rial.    This  material  will  be  scattered  over  three  or  four  different 


SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY.  12I 

fields  and  in  all  sorts  of  physical  condition,  as  some  men  take 
care  of  themselves  during  the  summer  while  others  do  not.  A 
coach  may  easily  be  deceived  by  lack  of  condition  in  a  man  who, 
when  in  shape,  would  play  a  strong  game.  For  this  reason 
critical  watching  and  very  likely  some  inquiry  as  to  the  past 
performance  of  the  man  is  very  advisable.  As  soon  as  the 
material  has  begun  to  be  sifted  it  becomes  necessary  to  sort  out 
a  part  of  it  for  the  'Varsity,  but  it  is  wise  not  to  take  a  great 
many  men  to  a  training  table  early  but  make  this  rather  a  reward 
of  merit  in  a  way,  at  the  same  time  taking  possibly  the  absolutely 
iure  men  who  are  not  likely  to  have  the  best  of  living  otherwise. 

All  this  matter  is  a  question  of  judgment  and  a  little  study 
and  reflection  on  the  subject  is  returned  many  times  over  in 
the  results  later  in  the  season.  It  is  hardly  worth  while,  al- 
though I  know  it  has  been  adopted  by  some  trainers,  to  put  men 
who  are  going  to  play  foot  ball  through  special  courses  of  gym- 
nastics, unless  it  may  be  for  some  special  weakness  of  the 
individual.  It  is  certainly  a  good  plan  for  foot  ball  men  to  be 
handled  by  a  track  trainer  in  learning  to  start  quickly.  Gym- 
nasium apparatus,  however,  is  not  proving  very  successful  for 
general  teams.  A  little  setting  up  work  in  the  early  part  of  the 
season  is  often  a  good  thing  and  some  running,  but  after  the 
season  is  once  under  way  the  men  have  plenty  to  do  without 
taking  these  special  exercises,  except  it  may  be  to  reduce  the 
weight  of  a  man  who  is  very  heavy.  Running  around  the  field 
for  men  who  are  temporarily  laid  ofT,  and  for  the  whole  squad 
in  the  early  part  of  the  season,  is  a  good  thing. 

Another  great  problem  is  to  keep  enough  backs  to  last  through 
the  season.  The  backs  are  usually  lighter  than  the  forwards  and 
being  given  a  good  deal  more  of  the  running  work  to  do  (and 
this  is  particularly  true  under  the  new  rules  where  the  men 
behind  the  line  will  have  to  do  a  good  deal  of  line  hammering 
without  heavy  interference)  is  rather  apt  to  call  for  all  the 
material  that  a  coach  and  trainer  can  keep  going.  And 
even  then  at  the  end  of  the  season  the  good  men  are  scarce 
The  first  part  of  the  season  the  practice  ought  to  be  very  short— 


122  SPALDING'S    ATHLETIC    LIBRARY. 

four  or  five  minutes— and  the  team  worked  up  to  longer  periods 
as  the  weather  grows  cooler  and  they  improve  in  condition. 
By  mid-season  they  should  be  able  to  play  two  fifteen-minute 
halves  with  ease,  and  if  possible  a  fifteen  and  a  twenty-minute 
half.  By  November  they  should  be  able  to  stand  a  slightly 
longer  period  in  order  that  by  the  time  of  the  big  games  they 
may  be  able  to  go  the  necessary  two  thirty-five  minute    halves. 

As  to  protectors  for  the  players,  it  is  well  worth  while  to  use 
such  protectors  as  are  likely  to  save  the  players  from  injury, 
but  of  late  it  is  feared  too  much  has  been  done  in  this  way  so 
that  the  players  were  rendered  rather  less  plucky,  and,  moreover, 
in  some  instances  were  probably  made  tender.  Under  the  present 
rules  the  doing  away  with  the  heavy  head  protectors  will  be  a 
great  step  in  advance  and  will  probably  save  many  injuries.  Nose 
guards  are  rather  difftcult  to  breathe  through,  but  properly  ar- 
ranged are  not  dangerous.  Protectors  for  the  thigh  and  shins 
are  good  things  and  if  a  man  receives  an  injured  shoulder  some 
kind  of  protection  there  is  also  advisable. 

So  far  as  foot  ball  is  concerned  a  strict  diet  is  not  essential, 
but  the  men  should  not  be  permitted  to  smoke,  nor  should  they 
be  given  alcoholic  drinks  except  for  medicinal  purposes  or  when 
a  man  is  very  tired.  The  living  should  be  plain  and  substantial 
and  every  effort  made  to  have  his  training  table  attractive  and 
the  food  appetizing. 


SPALDING'S    OFFICIAL    FOOT    BALL    GUIDE. 


WHAT  A  FOOT  BALL 
PLAYER  NEEDS 


f  °^  f  °^  f  °^  f  °^  ?°^  f  "^  §°^  ^°^  ^°^ 

^J)oa)  (5^§)  (^5)o2)  (^5)o2)  (y)o§)  (^5)o§)  ($5)oa)  ^g)  ^g 


The  pivotal  point  in  a  Rugby  foot  ball  game  is  naturally  the  ball  itself. 
Upon  this  object  the  whole  interest  in  the  game  centers,  and  naturally  if 
the  ball  is  not  right  the  game  suffers.  The  Spalding  Intercollegiate  Foot 
Ball  No.  J5  is  the  only  Official  Rugby  Foot  Ball,  simply  because  it  is  recog- 
nized as  a  really  perfect  ball  and  because  it  can  be  depended  upon  to  al 
ways  stand  up  and  give  a  good  account  of  itself.  Over  twenty  years  of 
use  in  this  country  without  a  single  ball  burst  is  sufficient  evidence  of  the 


X, 


quality  of  this  ball.  This  is  acr-onnttd  tor  heoause  of  the  close  inspection 
at  the  tannery  and  again  after  the  balls  are  finished,  and  as  a  matter  of 
fact,  it  is  rarely  that  even  the  slightest  defect  in  either  leather  or  sewing 
is  overlooked,  so  careful  is  this  factory  inspection.  The  No.  J5  Official 
Rugby  Foot  Ball  is  guaranteed  absolutely.  It  is  put  up  complete  with 
leather  case  and  pure  Para  rubber  bladder  and  inflater,  lacing  needle  and 
rawhide  lace  are  also  included.  The  price  of  the  No.  J5  foot  ball  complete 
is  $5.00.  Other  Spalding  Rugby  foot  balls  are  furnished  at  prices  running 
from  $L00  each,  up.    All  of  them  are  made  of  good  quality  material;  they 


SPALDING'S    OFFICIAL    FOOT    BALL    GUIDE. 

are  sewn  in  the  most  careful  manner  in  the  Spalding  factory  and  they  are 
all  guaranteed  absolutely,  both  as  regards  material  and  workmanship.  In 
the  Spalding  Catalogue  of  Foot  Ball  Goods  and  other  athletic  supplies  will 
be  found  the  most  complete  line  of  equipment  for  the  Rugby  game  Blad- 
ders, foot  ball  inflaters,  including  also  a  very  satisfactory  style  of  foot  ball 
timer,  which  costs  $2.50  each.  With  this  timer  it  is  possible  to  time  accu- 
rately an  entire  half  of  a  foot  ball  match,  stopping  during  interruptions 
and  starting  again  when  players  resume,  the  timing  going  on  continuously 
until  the  end  of  the  half. 

Another  article  which  is  included  in  the  Spalding  line  and  which  is  really 
very  necessary  for  a  foot  ball  team  that  is  anxious  to  perfect  itself  in  the 
game  is  the  Spalding  Foot  Ball  Tackling  Machine,  including  the  special 
releasing  attachment  which  they  have  devised.  Most  of  the  accidents  on 
the  foot  ball  field  are  caused  by  the  lack  of  knowledge  on  the  part  of  the 
players  of  the  proper  method  of  tackling  opponent  players,  and  this 
device  has  been  gotten  up  in  order  to  instruct  players  how  to  tackle  prop- 
erly. The  tackling  dummy  itself,  made  of  brown  canvas  without  joining 
at  waist  and  reinforced  at  bottom  with  heavy  sole  leather,  costs  $15.00  each. 
The  releasing  attachment,  complete  with  pulley  block  to  run  on  cross  rod 
and  spliced  to  connecting  rope,  costs  $10.00  each,  and  the  steel  cross  rod. 
threaded  at  both  ends,  complete  with  nuts  and  washers,  costs  $7.50. 


WHAT  TO  WEAR  FOR  FOOT  BALL. 
Various  rulings  have  been  made  by  the  Rules  Committee  in  regard  to  the 
style  of  outfit  that  should  be  permitted  for  use  by  foot  ball  players.  In  this 
particular,  Spalding  foot  ball  equipment  will  be  found  to  conform  always 
to  the  latest  rulings  of  the  Rules  Committee.  There  is  not  an  article  in- 
cluded in  the  Spalding  line  which  is  not  made  in  exact  accordance  with  the 
ofiicial  rules,  and  in  purchasing  from  A.  G. 
Spalding  &  Bros,  the  player  may  be  certain 
that  the  equipment  supplied  is  i-ight  in  every 
particular  and  is  correct  for  use  on  the  foot 
ball  field 
The  best  grade  of  foot  ball  clothing  included 

in  the  Spalding  line  is  known 

as  the  'Varsity,  and  in  this 

grade  the  sleeveless  jackets 

cost  for  the  VK  style,  which 

is  specially  reinforced,  $1.50 

each,  and  for  the  VJ  regular 

style,$l  25each.  The  trousers 

in  this  quality  cost  $2.50  per 

pair.   Tliey  are  known  as  the 

No  VT.  and  a  special  union 
No.  VK.  suit  made  up  of  the  No.  VT  No.  VT. 

trousers  and  the  No.  VJ  jacket,  connected  by  a  substantial  elastic  belt,  cost? 


SPALDING'S    OFFICIAL    FOOT    BALL    CUIDE. 


No.  30 


$5.00  complete  Moleskin  foot  ball  pants  cost  in  the  various  qualities,  No, 
OOR.  paddnd,  $5  00  per  pair,  sanit-  quality,  uupa(l<le<l,  $4.00  per  pair,  and  in 
No.  OJMR  quality,  padded.  $3.25  per  pair.  Canvas  trousers  cost  from  85 
cents  to  $1.75  per  pair,  and  sleeveless  canvas  jackets  cost  from  40  cents  to 
75  cents  each.     ' 

The  Spalding  No  30  shin  guard  is  made  up  on  what  are 
generally  recognized  as  the  only  correct  principles.  It  really 
protects  without  being  uncomfortably  heavy,  and  is  listed  at 
$2.00  per  pair.  Spalding  furnishes  other  styles  also,  all  of 
which  are  well  made,  at  $1.50,  $1.00,  50  cents  and  40  cents 
per  pair.  Well  made  shoulder  pads  of  the  best  quality, 
No.  B,  cost  $2.50  each.  The  No.  D  leather  shoulder  pad  costs 
Sl.OO  each>  and  other  styles  of  leather  and  canvas  pads  cost 
50  cents  and  25  cents  each  A  combined  leg,  knee  and  shin 
guard,  the  Spaldins:  No  C,  costs  $5.00  each,  and  it  is  a  very 
satisfactory  article  indeed 

An  article  that  was  designed  by  Mike  Murphy,  trainer  of  the  University 
of  Pennsylvania  foot  ball  team,  and  for  many  ye^rs  trainer  of  the  Yale  foot 
])all  team,  is  the  Spalding  patent  ankle  brace  for  foot  ball  shoes.  It  is 
made  of  finely  tempered  steel,  jointed,  and  absolutely  prevents  turning 
of  the  ankle.  It  can  be  put  in  by  any  shoemaker.  The  price  of  this  ankle 
brace  is  50  cetits  per  rair. 

The  Spalding  styles;  of  head  harness  have  become  universally  known  as 
the  only  e  Drrect  styles  for  use  by  up-to-date  foot  ball  players  and  for  this 

season   they   have   retained 

the  styles  which  they  made 

up  with  such  good  success 

hist  season,  the  best  of  which 

was  the  No  A  style  at  $5.00 

each,  the  others  being  No,  B 

at  $3.00  and  No.  C  at  $2  00, 

They  have  added  this  season, 

however,  three  other  styles, 

light  in  weight,  well  venti 

lated  and  all  furnished  with 
adjustable  ear  pieces.    These  are  No.  M,  unpadded,  $2.50  eacii  and  No.  MP, 
padded  with  felt.  $2.50  each,  and  No.  E,  $1.50  each. 

Tlie  Morrill  nose  masks  are  too  well  known  to  need  any  special  descrip 
tion  They  are  made  now  in  four  different  styles  and  sizes,  and  the  price 
for  either  is  $1.50  each  They  are  all  described  fully  in  the  Spalding  cata 
logue.  Separate  mouthpieces  are  furnished  in  various  styles  also  for 
25  cents  each. 

Every  pair  of  Spalding  foot  ball  shoes  is  built  under  the  direct  super- 
vision of  experts  in  the  Spalding  factory.  They  are  worn  by  the  players 
on  every  college  and  school  team  of  any  importance  in  this  country.  I  he 
best  quality  of  the  Spalding  foot  ball  shoes  is  jinown  as  No.  A2-0,  and 


No.  A. 


No.  M. 
(Patent  applied  for.) 


SPALDING'S    OFFICIAL    FOOT    BALL    GUIDE. 


No.  A2-0.  Front  View.      No.  A2-0.  Side  View. 


is  reeogrnized  as  standard  by 
the  foot  ball  players  every- 
•  where.  It  is  made  of  the 
finest  kangraroo  leather  with 
circular  reinforce  on  sides. 
It  is  a  hand-made  shoe 
throughout,  really  a  genuine 
bench  made  shoe,  and  which 
is  different  from  what  is 
ordinarily  known  as  a  hand- 
made shoe,  as  this  is  a 
cobbler  made  shoe  through- 
out. The  price  of  the  No. 
A2-0  shoe  is  $7.50  per  pair. 
The  Spalding  No.  A2-0S  shoe 
is  made  in  the  same  quality, 
but  somewhat  lighter,  being 
designed  especially  for  sprinting,  and  sells  at  the  same  price,  $7.50.  The 
other  Spalding  foot  ball  shoes  are.  No.  A2-M,  $5.00  per  pair;  No.  A2-S, 
another  sprinting  shoe,  $5.00  per  pair,  and  No.  A-3,  $4.00  per  pair. 

A  copy  of  the  Spalding  Fall  and  Winter  Sports  Catalogue  containing 
prices  and  pictures  of  everything  necessary  for  foot  ball,  basket  ball, 
skating,  and  all  other  seasonable  pastimes  will  be  mailed  free  to  any 
address  on  request  to  any  Spalding  store,  a  list  of  which  is  gi^en  below: 

New  York  City-124-128  Nassau  Street  and  29-33  West  42d  Street. 

Philadelphia,  Pa.-1013  Filbert  Street. 

Boston,  Mass.— 73  Federal  Street. 

Baltimore,  Md.— 208  East  Baltimore  Street. 

Washington,  D.  C.-709  14th  Street,  N.  W.  (Colorado  Building). 

Pittsburg,  Pa. -439  Wood  Street. 

Buffalo,  N.  Y.-611  Main  Street. 

Syracuse,  N.  Y.— University  Block. 

Cincinnati.  O.— Fountain  Square,-27  East  5th  Street. 

('hicago,  111.— 147-149  Wabash  Avenue. 

St.  Louis,  MO.-710  Pine  Street. 

Cleveland,  0.-741  Euclid  Avenue. 

Kansas  City,  Mo.-llll  Walnut  Street. 

Minneapolis,  Minn.— 39  Sixth  Street,  South. 

Detroit,  Mich.  —254  Woodward  Avenue. 

New  Orleans,  La.  — 140  Carondelet  Street. 

Denver,  Colo.  —1616  Arapahoe  Street. 

San  Francisco,  Cal.— 134  Geary  Street. 

Montreal,  Canada— 443  St.  James  Street. 

London,  England— 53,  54,  55,  Fetter  Lane^  and  West  End  Branch,  29,  Hay- 
market,  S.  W 


The  Spalding  Official 

Intercollegiate 

Foot  Ball 


^=D^ 


C=?N 


/j~3  U^-»~  p~~  |~»_  CT!!  t^ 


No.  J5.  This  is  the  only  Official  Rugby  Foot 
Ball,  and  is  used  in  every  important  match  played 
in  this  country.  Guaranteed  absolutely  if  seal  of 
box  is  unbroken.  We  pack  with  leather  case  and 
pure  Para  rubber  bladder,  an  inflater,  lacing 
needle  and  rawhide  lace.      .      Complete,  $5.00 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice 

^^J        Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 


Montreal, 
Canada 


Commuiiicatious  addressed  to 

A„  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS.* 

in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention- 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  cover  of  this  bof)k. 


New  York 
Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston 
Pittsburg 
Baltimore 


Philadelphia 
Washington 
New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cleveland 

Detroit 


St.  Louis 
Cincinnati 
Kansas  City 


San  Francisco 

Denver 
Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5.  1907. 


THE 

Spalding  Rugby  ** Special" 


No.  A.  A  substantial  ball  in  every  detail.  Made  of  spe- 
cially tanned  imported  grain  leather  and  put  together  in 
a  most  thorough  manner.  Superior  in  style  and  quality 
to  the  many  balls  put  on  the  market  in  imitation  of  our 
Official  No.  J5  ball.  Each  ball  put  up  in  a  sealed  box  with 
guaranteed  bladder  and  rawhide  lace.       .       Each,  $3.50 

No.  B.  Selected  fine  grain  leather  case.  Well  made  and 
will  give  excellent  satisfaction.  Each  ball  packed  com- 
plete in  sealed  box  with  guaranteed  bladder  and  rawhide 
lace.     Regulation  size Each,  $3.00 

No.  S.  Good  quality  leather  case,  pebble  graining.  Each 
ball  packed  complete  with  guaranteed  bladder  in  sealed 
l)o\.     Substantially  made  throughout.     Regulation  size. 

Each,  $2.00 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice 

Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 


Montreal, 
Canada 


Communications  addressed  to 

A.  G.  SPALDING  &  BROS. 

in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention- 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  cover  of  ttiis  book. 


London, 
England 


Neiv  York 

Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston 
Pittsburg 
Baltimore 


Philadelphia 
Washington 
New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cleveland 

Detroit 


St.  Louis 
Cincinnati 


San  Francisco 
Denver 


Kansas  City    Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5, 1907. 


Rugby  Foot  Balls 


No.  F.  Handsomely  grained  cowhide  case  of  excellent 
quality.  Each  ball  packed  complete  with  guaranteed 
bladder  and  rawhide  lace  in  sealed  box.     Regulation  size. 

Each,  $2.50 

No.  C,  Well  made  leather  case,  pebble  graining;  standard 
trade-mark  quality.  Each  ball  packed  complete  with 
guaranteed  bladder  in  sealed  box.     Regulation  size. 

Each,  $1.50 

No.  D.     Taade-mark  quality  ;  leather  case,  pebbled  grain- 
ing.    Each    ball    complete    with    guaranteed    bladder    in 
sealed  box.     Regulation  size.     .         .         .     Each,  $1.25 
No.  25.     Leather  case,  trade-mark  quality.     Each  ball  com- 
plete with  guaranteed  bladder  in  sealed  box.     Regulation 

size Each,  $1.00 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice 
Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalog-ue  of  all  athletic  sports 


Commnnieatioiis  addressed  to 

A*  C.  SPALDING  &   BROS. 

in  any  of  the  foUowing  cities  will  receive  attention 
For  sH,reet  numbers  see  inside  front  cover  of  this  boi 


Montreal, 
Canada 


London, 
England 


New  York 
Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston  I  Philadelphia 
Pittsburg  \  Washington 
Baltimore  I  New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cleveland 

Detroit 


St.  Lotiis 
Cincinnati 
Kansas  City 


Sa7i  Francisco 

Denver 
Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5, 1907. 


Showing  No.  VK  Jacket.    Note  reinforce- 
ment and  extra  large  arm  holee. 


The  Spalding 

Special 

'Varsity 

Foot  Ball 

Jackets, 

Sleeveless 

■fATE  make  two  styles 
of  jackets,  both 
sleeveless.in  this  grade. 
The  illustrations  will 
show  some  of  the  fea- 
tures of  the  VK  style, 
which  is  made  accord- 
ing to  the  very  latest 
ideas.  Arm  holes,  par- 
ticularly, are  made  ex- 
tra large,  and  there  is 
a  heavy  reinforcement 
running  all  around 
them  and  around  neck 
and  back  to  give  addi- 
tional strength  where 
it  is  most  needed  and  to 
support  lacing  at  edges. 
No.VK.  Jacket,  sleeve- 
less. Each,  $1.50 
No.VJ.  Jacket,  sleeve- 
less ;  regular  style, 
without  reinforce- 

^^     „„  ^     ments.  Each.  $1.25 

No.  VK. 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports, 


Montreal, 
Canada 


Communications  addressed  to 

'  A.  C.  SPALDING  &  BROS. 

in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention: 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  cover  of  this  book. 


London, 
England 


New  York 

Buffalo 

Syracuse 


Boston 
Pittsburg 
Baltimore 


Philadelphia 
Washington 
New  Orleans 


Chicago  I    St.  Louis 

Cleveland]  Cincinnati 

Detroit  \  Kansas  City 


San  Francisco 

Denver 
Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5, 1907. 


=z====zz=:5fgfej 


ITe  Spalding  Special 
'Varsity  Foot  Ball  Trousers 


(PADDED) 


The  hips  and 
knees  are  prop- 
erly padded  ac- 
cording to  our 
improved  method, 
with  pure  curled 
hair,  and  the 
thighs  have  cane 
strips.  Abso- 
lutely best  grade 

throughout. 
Trousers  padded. 

No.  VT. 
Per  pair,    $2.50 


No.  VT. 


Send 


Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 


Ci>minuiii(*ations  addressed  to 


Montreal.]  At  C.  SPALDING    &    BROS.  London, 

Canada  \       in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention:      [  England 

For  street  numbers  see  inside  froTit  cover  of  this  book. 


New  York 
Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston  I  Philadelphia 
Pittsburg  Washington 
Baltimore  I  New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cleveland 

Detroit 


St.  Louis 
Cincinnati 
Kansas  City 


San  Francisco 

Denver 
Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5.  1907. 


=^ 


Spalding 
'Varsity 
Union 
Suit 


IWTADE  up  of  our 
^^^  'Varsity  No. 
VT  Pants  and  No. 
VJ  Jacket,  con- 
nected by  a  sub- 
stantial elastic 
belt.  This  suit 
will  give  excellent 
satisfaction.  It 
conforms  to  each 
movement  of  the 
body  and  makes 
an  ideal  outfit  in 
every  way. 

No.  VTJ. 

Spalding-  'Varsity 

Union   Foot  Ball 

Suit. 

Price,  $5.00 


No.  \TJ. 
Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5,  1907. 


Foot  Ball  Jackets 

Sleeveless  Jacket,  made  of  special  brown  canvas. 

soft  finish,  sewed  with  the  best  and  strongest 

linen  ;  hand  made  eyelets  for  lacing 

No.  I.     Each,  75c. 

Sleeveless  Jacket,  made  of  good  quality  brown 

canvas.     Well  made  throughout. 

No.  2.     Each,  50c. 

Sleeveless  Jacket,   good   quality   white  canvas. 

Well  made.     No.  3.     Each,  40C. 


No.  1 


Foot  Ball  Pants 

MOLESKIN 

Intercollegiate  Foot  Ball  Pants,  lace  front, 
made  of  the  best  and  most  serviceable 
drab  moleskin,  manufactured  expressly  for 
the  purpose.  The  hips  and  knees  are 
padded  according  to  our  improved  method 
with    curled    hair,    and    the    thighs  have 

cane   strips. 
No.  OOR.     Padded.      ,      Pair,  $5.00 
No.  OOR.     Unpadded.  "         4.00 

No.  OMR.     Made  in  same  style  as  our 
\x  mt^  No.  OOR,  but  of  a  cheaper  grade  of  mole- 

rt^^     ,         skin.     Padded.        .        .      Pair.  $3.25 
Showing    method   of  ^  a  m.i«  r  a  «* 

padding    Nos.   OOR,  CANVAS 

OMR,  IP  and  2P  ^^^^    jp^     Extra  quality    brown     canvas. 

soft  finish,  well  padded  throughout  and  cane  strips  at  thighs.     $1.75 

No.  2  P.     Good   quality  brown   canvas,  well  padded  and  substantially 

made.       . Per  pair.$  f  .50 

No.  X  P.     Made  of  Heavy  white  drill  and  well  padded.        "  .85  , 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice 

Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports 


Montreal, 
Canada 


Communications  addressed  to  

A4C  SPALDING    &    BROS.  I  London, 

in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention :  |  England 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  coverof  this  book. 


New  York 
Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston  I  Philadelphia 
Pittsburg  Washington 
Baltimore  I  New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cleveland 

Detroit 


St.  Louis    I  San  Francisco 
Cincinnati  Denver 

Kansas  City]    Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5,  1907. 


Spalding  Foot  Ball  Shoes 

Every  pair  of  Spalding  Foot  Ball  Shoes  is  built 
under  the  direct  supervision  of  experts  in  our  fac- 
tory. They  are  worn  by  the  players  on  every  college 
and  school  team  of  any  importance  in  this  country, 
and  notably  by  the  following  most  successful  teams: 
Yale,  Princeton,  Cornell,  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, Carlisle,  West  Point  and  Annapolis, 


NO.A2-0. 
Front  View 


No.  A2-0. 
Side  View 


No.  A2-0S.  Arrange- 

Side  View       merit  of  Cleats 


No.  A2-0.  Recognized  as  standard  by  foot 
ball  players  everywhere.  Finest  kangaroo 
leather  with  circular  reinforce  on  sides. 
Hand  made  throughout,  a  genuine  bench 
made  shoe.      .        .        .        Per  pair,  $7.5 O 

No.  A2-OS.  Sprinting  Shoe,  extremely  light ; 
same  quality  as  our  No.  A2-0.      Pair,  $7.50 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports.  vIt' 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5,  1907, 


Spalding  Foot  Ball  Shoes 

Every  pair  of  Spalding  Foot  Ball  Shoes  is  built 
under  the  direct  supervision  of  experts  in  our  fac- 
tory. They  are  worn  by  the  players  on  every  college 
and  school  team  of  any  importance  in  this  country, 
and  notably  by  the  following  most  successful  teams: 
Yale,  Princeton,  Cornell,  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, Carlisle,  West  Point  and  Annapolis. 


No.  A2-M  No.  A2-S  No.  A-3 

No.  A2-M.  The 'Varsity  Shoe.  Finest  black 
calfskin;  hand  made  throughout.  Equipped 
with  Spalding  Foot  Ball  Ankle  Brace.  Will 
^ive  excellent  satisfaction.     Per  pair,  $5.00 

No.  A2-S.  The  Club  Special  Shoe.  Sprint- 
ing Shoe,  extremely  light;  black  calfskin, 
good  quality,  very  well  made.      Pair,  $5.00 

No.  A-3.  The  Amateur  Special  Shoe.  Black 
calfskin,  good  quality,  machine  sewed.  A 
very  serviceable  shoe.  Per  pair,  $4.00{ 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

^  Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 

.  These  prices  in  effect  July  5,  1907. 


THE  SPALDING  HEAD  HARNESS 


No.  C 

No.  B.  Soft  black  leather  top 
and  sides,  soft  leather  ear 
pieces,  adjustable  chin  strap; 
rear  extension.  Top  padded 
with  felt  and  well  ventilated. 
Sides  stitched  and  felt  padded 
with  canvas  lining.  S3. 00 
No.  M.  Soft,  good  quality 
black  leather,  unpadded.  Has 
adjustable  ear  pieces,  gives 
necessary  protection,  and  at 
the  same  time  is  one  of  the 
most  camfortable  and  satis- 
factory styles  of  head  harness 
that  we  have  ever  made. 

Each,  $2.50 
No.  M  P.    Similar  in  style  to 
No.  M,  but  padded  with  felt. 
Each,  $2.50 
No.  E.     Made  of   special  and 
very  durable  material ;  nicely 
padded  and  well  made.    Same 
design  as  No.  MP.      $  1 .  50 
No.  C.    Soft  black  leather  top,  well  ventilated;  moleskin  sides  and  ear 
pieces,  elastic  chin  strap ;     rear  extension.    Nicely  padded  with  felt 

and  substantially  made Each,  $2.00 

When  ordering  any  of  these  Head  Harness  specify  size  of  hat  worn. 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice 
Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 


Patent  applied  for. 


Montreal, 
Canada 


Couimuiiications  addressed  to 

A«  G.  SPALDiNC  &  BROS. 

iu  auy  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention: 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  coverof  this  book. 


London, 
England 


New  York 
Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston 
Pittsburg 
Baltimore 


Philadelphia 

Washington 
New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cleveland 

Detroit 


St.  Louis    I  Sa7i  Francisco 
Cincinnati  Deuiier 

Kansas  City  I    Minn  ea  pol  is 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5,  1907. 


THE  SPALDING  HEAD  HARNESS 


(Patent  applied  for.) 

No.  A.  Firm  tanned 
black  leather,  molded  to 
shape,  perforated  for  ven- 
tilation and  well  padded. 
Adjustable  chin  strap  : 
rear  extension.  This 
head  harness  presents  a 
perfectly  smooth  sur- 
face, and,  while  giving 
absolute  protection,  i  s 
one  of  the  coolest  and 
lightest  made.  When 
ordering,  specify  size  of 
hat  worn.      Each,  $5.00 


MORRILL  NOSE  MASK 

(Patented  Sept.  29,  1891) 

None  genuine  which  do  not 
bear  the  name  Morrill  and  date 
of  patent.  Morrill's  Nose  Mask 
is  made  of  the  finest  rubber,  and 
no  wire  or  metal  is  used  in  its 
construction.  It  has  become  a 
necessity  on  every  foot  ball 
team  and  afYords  absolute  pro- 
tection to  the  nose  and   teeth. 

No.  1.      Regulation  style  and  size. 
No.  IB.   Regulation  style,  youths' size,     .  '* 

No.  O.     Full  size,  with  adjustable  mouthpiece.    " 
No.  OB.  Youths'  size,  with  adjustable  mouthpiece. 
Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice 

Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports 


Montreal, 
Canada 


Communications  addressed  to 

Ai  C.  SPALDING  &.  BROS. 

in  any  of  the  follo-wing  cities  will  receive  attention- 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  cover  of  this  book 


London, 
England 


New  York 
Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston 
Pittsburg 
Baltimore 


Philadelphia 
Washington 
Neu'  Orleans 


Chicago       St.  Louis 

Cleveland]  Cincinnati 

Detroit  [Kansas City 


San  Francisco 

Denver 
Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5,  1907. 


No.  30 


Spalding  Patented  Shin  Guard 

(Patent  applied  for) 
We  claim  that  this  shin  guard  is  made  accord- 
ing to  the  only  correct  principles,  in  that : 
First— It  is  built  \o  prevent  contact  with 
the  sensitive  shin  bone,  rather  than  to  at- 
teynpt  to  soften  a  blow  by  piling  on  padding. 
Second— It  is  thoroughly  ventilated,  mak- 
ing it  the  most  comfortable  to  wear  of  any. 
Third— It  is  extremely  light  in  weight, 
simply  consisting  of  elkskin  ventilated  leg- 
piece  with  molded   "barbette"    piece    and 
soft  tanned  leather  fastening  straps. 
No.  30.    Per  pair,  $2.00 


Spalding  Foot  BaU  Shin  Guards 

No.  60.  Covering  of  black  lea- 
ther, backed  up  with  real  rattan 
reeds;  felt  padding.  Leather 
straps  and  bindings  Light  in 
weight  and  wellmade.  Pair,  $1.50 
No.  10.  Best  quality  moleskin, 
same  material  as  in  our  No.  OOR 
foot  ball  pants,  backed  up  with 
real   rattan    reeds.       Pair,    $1.00 

We    are   snaking    two   sizes 

and    styles    of   canvas    shin 

guards,  both  well  made  and 

light  in  weight. 

No.  9.     Canvas,  length  11  inches,  with  reeds. 
No.  8.     Canvas,  length  9  inches,  with  reeds. 

Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 


40c. 


Communications  addressed  to 
Montreal\  A,  C.  SPALDING   &   BROS. 

Canada  \       in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention: 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  cover  of  this  book. 


London, 
England 


New  York 
Buffalo 
Syracuse 


Boston  I  Philadelphia 
Pittsburg  I  Washington 
Baltimore  \  New  Orleans 


Chicago 

Cleveland 

Detroit 


St.  Louis 
Cincinnati 
Kansas  City 


San  Francisco 

Denver 
Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5,  1907. 


LAWSON 

FOOT  BALL  TIMER 


A  continuous  timer,  arranged  so  that  an  entire  half  may  be 
timed  accurately,  stopped  during  interruptions,  and  started 
again  when  play  is  resumed.     Can  be  used  also  for  timing 

other  athletic  events. 
Lawson  Foot  Ball  Timer,  Nickel  Case.      .     Each,  $2.50  j 
Prices  subject  to  change  without  notice. 
^       Send  for  handsomely  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  athletic  sports. 


Montreal, 
Canada 


Commuaii-ittions  addressed  to 

Ai  C.  SPALDING  &  BROS. 

in  any  of  the  following  cities  will  receive  attention: 
For  street  numbers  see  inside  front  cover  of  this  book. 


London, 
England 


New  York 

Buffalo 

Syracuse 


Boston     I  Philadelphia      Chicago  I     St.  Louis 
Pittsburg      Washington      Cleveland]  Cincinnati 
Baltimore  1  New  Orleans       Detroit  \  Kansas  City 


San  Francisco 

Denver 
Minneapolis 


These  prices  in  effect  July  5.  1907. 


THE  FOLLOWING  INDEX  FROM  SPALDING'S 
LATEST  CATALOGUES  WILL  GIVE  AN 
IDEA  OF  THE  GREAT  VARIETY  OF 
ATHLETIC  GOODS  MANUFACTURED  AND 
SOLD    BY    A.    G.    SPALDING    &    BROS. 


Abdominal  Masseur  64 
Abdomen  Prot'r  13,  41 
Ankle  Brace,  Foot  Ball  7 
Ankle  Brace,  Skate  32 
Ankle  Pad,  Hockey  34 
Ankle  Supporters  .  32 
Ash  Bars.  .  .  63 
Attachments,  Chest 

Weight.  .  .  61 
Backstops,  Outdoor  44 
Balls.  Base  .  .  69 
Balls.  Basket  .  43,  44 
Balls.  Foot,  Ass'n  10,  11 
Balls.  Foot.  Rugby  3,4 
Balls.  Golf  .  .  25 
Balls.  Hand  .  .  51 
Balls,  Indoor  Base  .  42 
Balls,  Medicine  .  51 
Balls.  Polo  .  .41 
Ball.  Push  .  .  51 
Balls.  Volley  .  .  51 
Balls.  Water  Polo  .  51 
Bar  Bells.  .  .  63 
Bar  Stalls  .  .  56 
Bar  Stall  Benches  .  56 
Bars,  Trapeze .  .  66 
Bars,  Horizontal  .  67 
Bags,  Skate  .  .  33 
Bags,  Striking  54.  55 
Bandages.  Elastic  .  14 
Bandages,  Silk  .  14 
Bars,  Parallel  .  .67 
Bases,  Indoor  .  .  42 
Base  Balls  .  .  69 
Basket  Balls  .  43.  44 
Bats.Indoor  Base  Ball  42 
Belts.  Leather  11,  15 
Belts.  Worsted  Web  11 ,  15 
Belts,  Elastic  .  .  14 
Blades.  Foil  .  .  58 
Blades,  Sword  .     58 

Bladders.  Basket  Ball  44 
Bladders.  Foot  Ball  5. 11 
Bladders,  St'k'g  Bag  55 
^ooks.  Basket  Ball 

Score     .        .        .44 


Caddy  Bags  .  .  25 
Caps.  Skull  .  .  12 
Catchers'  Protector  42 
Caps,  University  .  21 
Chamois  Pad.  Fenc'g  60 
Chest  Weights  .  61 
Clubs.  Indian  .  62.  63 
Cross  Bars  .  .  49 
Cushions.  Toboggan  46 
Discus  .  .  .  49 
Disks.  St'k'g  Bag  .  57 
Dumb  Bells  .  62.  63 
Elastic  Bandages  .  14 
Elbow  Protector  .  60 
Emblems .  .  .  21 
Exerciser.  Home  .  68 
Exercisers.  Whitely  68 
Exhibition  Clubs  .  63 
Fencing  Sticks  .  58 
Finger  Protection  .  44 
Flags.  College  .     21 

Foils,  Fencing  .  58 
Foot  Balls,  Ass'n  10,  11 
Foot  Balls,  Rugby  3,  4 
Foot  Ball  Goal  Nets  11 
Foot  Ball  Timer  .  5 
Glove,  Foot  Ball  .  13 
Gloves,  Hockey  .  37 
Gloves,  Boxing  52.  53 
Gloves,  Fencing  .  59 
Gloves,  Handball  .  51 
Goals,  Basket  Ball .  44 
Goals,  Foot  Ball  .  11 
Goals,  Hockey  .  37 
Golf  Clubs  .  .  25 
Grips,  Athletic  .  22 
Gymnasium  Board, 

Home  .  .  .65 
Gymnas'm.  Home  .  65 
Hammers,  Athletic  48 
Handballs  .  .  51 
Hangers.  Indian  Club  63 
Hats,  University  .  21 
Head  Harness .  .  8 
Health  Pull  .  .  68 
Hob  Nails        .        .    17 


Hockey  Sticks  36,  37 
Hockey  Pucks  .  37 
Hockey  Goals  .  .  37 
Hockey  Tights  .  38 
Horizontal  Bars.  Door- 
way .  .  .67 
Hurdles,  Safety  .  50 
Indoor  Base  Ball 

Goods  ...  42 
Indian  Clubs  .  62,  63 
Inflaters,  Foot  Ball  5 
Inflaters,  Strik'g  Bag  55 
Jackets,  Fencing  .  60 
Jackets.  Foot  Ball .  6 
Jerseys  12.  18,  19,  38.  45 
Knee  Protector  .  42 
Knickerbockers.  Foot 

Ball  ...  12 
Lace.  Foot  Ball  .  5 
Lanes  for  Sprints  .  50 
Leg  Guards.  Foot  Ball  7 
Leg  Guards,  Hockey  38 
Leg  Guards,  Polo  .  41 
Letters,  Embroidered  21 
Letters,  Woven  .  21 
Lockers.  Durand  .  68 
Machine,  Tackling .  5 
Masks,  Nose  .  .  8 
Masks.  Fencing  .  60 
Masseur.  Abdominal  64 
Medicine  Balls  .  51 
Mattresses  .  .  67 
Measur'g  Tape.  Steel  50 
Megaphones  .  .  5 
Mitts.  Striking  Bag  55 
Mitts,  Handball  ,  51 
Mocassins  .  .  47 
Mouthpiece  .  .  8 
Net,  Volley  Ball  .  51 
Needle,  Lacing  .  5 
Nose  Masks  .  .  8 
Numbers,  Compet'rs'  49 
Pads,  Foot  Ball  .  7 
Pants,  Basket  Ball.  45 
Pants,  Foot  Ball. 
Rugby  ...      6 


SPALDING'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 
AND  PRICE  LIST  FURNISHED  FREE  UPON 
APPLICATION  TO  ANY  OF  SPALDING'S 
STORES-FOR  LOCATION  OF  WHICH  SEE 
INSIDE  FRONT  COVER  OF  THIS  BOOK.    :    •    • 


Pants,  F't  Ball,  Ass'n  12 
Pants,  Knee  .  .  20 
Pants,  Roller  Polo  .  41 
Pants,  Running  .  22 
Pants.  Hockey  .  38 
Plastrons,  Fencing-  60 
Platforms.St'k'gBagST 
Poles,  Ski  .        .    47 

Poles,  Vaulting  .  49 
Polo  Goods  .  .41 
Polo  Goal  Cages  .  41 
Polo  Sticks  .  .  41 
Protect'r.  Abdomen  13 
Protector.  Elbow  .  60 
Protectors,  Foot  Ball  13 
Protectors,  Polo  .  41 
Protector,  Wire  13,  41 
Protection  for  Run- 
ning Shoes  .  .  22 
Pucks,  Hockey  .  37 
Push  Ball  .  .  51 
Pushers,  Chamois  .  22 
Puttees.  Golf  .  .  17 
Quoits  .  .  .51 
Rapiers  .  .  .58 
Referees'  Whistle  .  50 
Referees'  Horns  .  50 
Rings,  Exercising  .  66 
Rings,  Swinging  .  66 
Rowing  Machines  .  64 
Rubber  Discs  .  ,  17 
Rubber  Mouthpiece  8 
Scabbards  for  Skates  26 
Score  Books,  Basket 

Ball  ...  44 
Seven-foot  Circle  .  50 
Shin  Guards,  Rugby  7 
Shin  Guards,  Ass'n  11 
Shin  Guards,  Hockey  38 
Shin  Guards.  Polo  .  41 
Shirts  .  .  .  20 
Shirts,  Basket  Ball  45 
Shirts,  Ass'n  F't  Ball  12 
Shirts,  Sleeveless  .  20 
Shoes,  Basket  Ball  45 
Shoes,  Bowling       .    19 


Shoes,  Clog  .  .  19 
Shoes,  Cross  Country  22 
Shoes,  Fencing  .  59 
Shoes,  Foot  Ball, 

Rugby  ...  9 
Shoes,  Foot  Ball, 

Association  .  .  11 
Shoes,  Indoor  Ath. .  22 
Shoes,  Golf  .  .  17 
Shoes,  Gymnasium  23 
Shoes,  Gymnasium., 

Ladies'  .  .  .  23 
Shoes,  Jumping  .  22 
Shoes,  Running  .  22 
Shoes,  Skating  34,  35 
Shoes,  Ladies' Skat'g  35 
Shoes,  Squash  .    24 

Shot,  Athl'c,  Indoor  48 
Shot,  Massage  .  64 
Shot.  Regulation  .  48 
Shoulder  Pads  .      7 

Single  Trapeze  .  66 
Skate  Bags  .  .  33 
Skates,  Hockey  27,29, 30 
Skate  Holders  .    26 

Skates,  Ice  .  28,  32,  33 
Skates,  Ra.Mug  .  26 
Skates,  Rink,  Ice  .  31 
Skate  Rollers  .  .  40 
Skates,  Roller  39,  40 
Skates,  Tubular  .  26 
Skate  Sundries  26,32,33 
Skate  Straps  .  .  33 
Skis  ....  47 
Sleeve  Bands,  College  21 
Snow  Shoes  .  .  47 
Snow  Shoe  Sandals  47 
Standards,  Vaulting  49 
Standards,  Volley  Ball  51 
Starter's  Pistol  .  50 
Sticks,  Hockey  30.  37 
Sticks,  Fencing  .  58 
Sticks,  Polo  .  .  41 
Steel  Tapes  .  .  50 
Stockings         .        .     15 


Stockings,  Bask.  Ball  42 
Stockings,  Foot  Ball  12 
Stop  Watch  .  .  50 
Striking  Bags .  54,  55 
Suit,  Union  Foot  Ball  6 
Supporters,  Elastic  13 
Supporters,  Hackey 

Ankle  .  .  14,34 
Supporters,  Wrist  .  13 
Suspensories    .  13 

Squash  Balls  .  .  24 
Squash  Racquets  ,  24 
Squash  Ten.  Rackets  24 
Sweaters .  .  16,  17 
Swivels,  Strik'g  Bag  54 
Swords,  Fencing  ,  58 
Swords,  Duelling  .  58 
Tackling  Machine  .  5 
Take-off  Board  .  50 
Tapes,  Measuring  .  50 
Thumb  Protector  .  44 
Tights  ...  20 
Toboggans  .  .  46 
Toboggan  Cushions  46 
Toboggan  Toe  Caps  46 
Toe  or  Stop  Boards  50 
Toques  .  .  .  46 
Trapeze,  Single  .  66 
Trapeze,  Adjustable  66 
Trunks  .    20 

Umpires'  Whistle  .  50 
Uniforms,  Indoor  .  42 
Vaulting  Poles  and 

Standards  .  .  49 
Volley  Ball  .    51 

Water  Polo  Ball  .  51 
Whitely  Exerciser  .  68 
Waist  Reducer  .  56 
Wands.  Calisthenic  63 
Wands,  School  .  63 
Weights.  56-lb.  48 

Wrestling  Machine.  56 
Wrist  Supporters  .  13 
Wrist  Machines  .  66 
Y.  M.  C.  A.  Trousers    20 


SE 


Albert  G.  and  J.  Walter  Spalding  commenced  business  March 
ist,  1876,  at  Chicago,  under  the  firm  name  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bro. , 
with  a  capital  of  $800.  Two  years  later  their  brother-in-law, 
William  T.  Brown,  came  into  the  business,  and  the  firm  name 
was  then  changed  to  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bros. 

The  business  was  founded  on  the  Athletic  reputation  of  Mr. 
A.  G.  Spalding,  who  acquired  a  national  prominence  in  the  realm 
of  Sport,  as  Captain  and  Pitcher  of  the  Forest  City's  of  Rockford, 
111.  (1865-70),  the  original  Boston  Base  Ball  Club  (Champions  of 
the  United  States,  1871-75),  and  the  Chicago  Ball  Club  C1876-77), 
first  Champions  of  the  National  League.  He  was  also  one  of  the 
original  organizers,  and  for  many  years  a  director,  of  the  National 
League  of  America,  the  premier  Base  Ball  organization  of  the 
world.  jMr.  Spalding  has  taken  an  important  part  in  Base  Ball 
affairs  ever  since  it  became  the  National  Game  of  the  United  States 
at  the  close  of  the  Civil  War  in  1865.  The  returning  veterans  of 
that  War,  who  had  played  the  game  as  a  camp  diversion,  dis- 
seminated this  new  American  field  sport  throughout  the  country, 
and  thus  gave  it  its  national  character. 

Base  Ball  Goods  were  the  only  articles  of  merchandise  carried 
the  first  year,  the  total  sales  amounting  to  $11,000.  Gradually 
implements  and  accessories  of  Athletic  Sports  were  added,  until 
the  firm  now  manufacture  the  requisites  for  all  kinds  of  Athletic 
Sports.  Originally  the  firm  contracted  for  their  supplies  from 
outside  manufacturers,  but  finding  it  impossible,  by  this  method, 
to  keep  the  standard  of  quality  up  to  their  high  ideals,  they 
gradually  commenced  the  manufacture  of  their  own  goods,  and 
by  the  acquisition  from  time  to  time  of  various  established 
factories  located  in  different  parts  of  the  country,  are  now  able 
to,  and  do  manufacture  in  their  own  factories  everything  bearing 
the  Spalding  Trade- Mark,  which  stands  the  world  over  as  a 
guarantee  of  the  highest  quality. 


J 


There  are  over  three  thousand  persons  ernployed  in  various 
capacities  in  A,  G.  Spalding  &  Bros.'  factories  and  stores  located 
in  all  the  leading  cities  of  the  United  States,  Canada  and  England. 
A  capital  of  over  $4,000,000  is  employed  in  carrying  on  this  busi- 
ness, and  the  annual  sales  exceed  the  total  combined  annual  sales 
of  all  other  manufacturers  in  the  world  making  a  similar  line 
of  goods. 

A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bros,  have  always  taken  a  leading  part  in 
the  introduction,  encouragement  and  support  of  all  new  Sports 
and  Games,  and  the  prominence  attained  by  Athletic  Sports  in 
the  United  States  is  in  a  very  great  measure  due  to  the  energy, 
enterprise  and  liberality  of  this  progressive  concern.  They  were 
the  pioneers,  and  in  fact  the  founders,  of  the  Athletic  Goods 
Trade  in  America,  and  are  now  universally  recognized  as  the 
undisputed  Leaders  in  the  Athletic  Goods  line  throughout  the 
world. 

The  late  Marshall  Field  of  Chicago,  America's  greatest  Mer- 
chant, speaking  of  the  business  of  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bros.,  said: 
"I  am  familiar  with  its  early  career,  growth  and  development, 
and  when  I  compare  its  unpromising  outlook  and  the  special 
field  for  its  operations  that  existed  at  its  inception  in  1876,  witii 
its  present  magnitude,  I  consider  it  one  of  the  most  remarkable 
mercantile  successes  of  the  world." 

The  millions  of  Athletes  using  them,  and  the  thousands  of 
Dealers  selling  them,  attest  to  the  High  Quality  of  Spalding's 
Athletic  Goods,  and  they  must  determine  the  future  history  of 
this  concern. 


^l^. 


ATHLETIC   I 


B         LIBRARY  OF  CONGRESS      "^f 

'   iiiiiiiiliilfiii  iiiiiiiiiiiii   ^ 


0  006  010  781  6 


A  separate  book  covers    _    . 

and  is   Official  and  Standard 
Price  10  cents  each 


GRAND    PRIZE 


ST.  LOUIS.  1904 


GRAND   PRIX 


PARIS,  1900 


Spalding 
athletic  goods 

ARE  THE    STANDARD   OF  THE  IV^ORLD 


A.  G.  Spalding  ®  Bros. 

MAINTAIN   WHOLESALE    and  RETAIL  STORES  /n  the    FOLLOWING  CITItlS 


NEW  YORK  CHIC 

PHILADELPHIA  ST. 

BOSTON  C 

BALTIMORE 
WASHINGTON 
PITTSBURG 
BUFFALO 
SYRACUSE 

NEW   ORLEANS 
MONTREAL.  CAN 


CHICAGO 
ST. LOUIS 
CINCINNATI 
CLEVELAND 
DETROIT 

KANSAS  CITY 
MINNEAPOLIS 
DENVER 
)ANS  SAN  FRANCISCO 

LONDON,  ENG 


Factories  owned  and  operated  by  A.G.Spaldin^  &  Bros,  and  whei 
"odcMarktcf    Athletic  Goods    are    made    are  located   inthe   folli 


IHEW  YORK       CHICAGO      SAK   FRANCISCO     CHICOPEE,MASS.| 
BROOKLYN       BOSTON        PHILADELPHIA      LONDON,  ENG.